Chevrolet - GMC PICKUP TRUCKS - Owners Manual - 1997 - 1997

1 1997 1997 1997 1997 1997 '997 / R ' S 1? Supplement to the1997 Chevrolet Lumina and Monte Carlo Owner’s Manuals This is a correction toinformationfound on page 2-34and 2-35 (Lumina)and page 2-34 (Monte Carlo). Daytime Running Lamps/ Automatic Headlamp Control Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL system will make your high-beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: The ignition is on, The headlamp switch is off and The parking brake is released. When the DRL areon, only your reduced intensity high-beam headlamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and otherlamps won’t be on.Your instrument panelwon’t be lit up either. When it’s dark enough outside, yourDRL will turn off and yourlow-beam headlamps will turn on.The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on. When it’s brightenough outside, the low-beam headlamps willgo out and DRLturns on your high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set theparking brake while the ignitionis in OFF or LOCK. Then start your vehicle.The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, youshould turn on the regular headlamp system whenyou need it. 97LUMWCARL0001 1 e / 1 I This is a correction to informationfound on page 6-58 and 6-59for Lumina and Monte Carlo. Instrument Panel Fuse Block B Not Used C Power Windows D Power Seats E Not Used Fuse 1 Rating Description Cigar Lighter-- Instrument Panel and Console Cigar Lighters Not Used Not Used HVAC -- HVAC Control Assembly Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL Module, HVAC Control Head, Defogger Relay, (S.E.O.) Digital Speedometer Circuit Breaker Description A Not Used 2 5 Hazard Flasher 6 R.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.) This isa correction to informution found on page 6-58 and 6-59for Lumina and Monte Carlo. Fuse Rating Description Fuse Rating Description 7 Starter Relay 17 Not Used 8 Not Used 18 Not Used 9 Not Used 19 10 YP Electronics Battery -- Chime Module, Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM), Theft-Deterrent Module, Radio DLC Power Accessory #1-- Door Lock Switches, Trunk Courtesy Lamp,O/S Mirror Switch, (S.E.O.) Emergency Vehicle-Rear Compartment Lid Lamp or Window Panel Lamps 11 Power Accessory##2-- Sunroof Control Unit, (S.E.O.) Accessory Feed 20 Steering Wheel Control#2 -- Steering Wheel Radio Controls 12 Anti-Theft/PCM -- Theft-Deterrent Module, Powertrain Control Module, (PCM) IGN Syst. Relay 21 Air Bag -- Air Bag System 22 Cruise Control -- Cruise Control Cut-Out Switch, Cruise Control Module, Turn Signal Cruise ControlSwitches 23 Stoplamps -- Stoplamp Switch (Brake) 24 Not Used 25 EnglisWMetric (S.E.O.) 26 Not Used 27 Not Used 13 14 ABS -- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM), ABS Relay HVAC Blower Motor -- Blower Motor Relay 15 L.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.) 16 Steering Wheel Control #1 -- Steering Wheel Radio Control Lighting : This is a correction to information foundon page 6-58 and 6-59for M i n a and Monte Carlo. 1 Fuse 28 4 Rating Description CTSY Lamps -- Vanity Mirrors, UP Compartment Lamp, US Lighted Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp Fuse Rating Description 38 Radio -- Radio, Power Drop 39 I/P Electronics Ignition Feed-Headlamp Switch,Instrument Cluster, Chime Module, Keyless Entry Receiver, Stoplamp switch (TCC and BTSI) (S.E.O.) Accessory Switch 40 Not Used 41 Power Drop 29 Wiper -- Wiper Switch 30 Turn Signal -- Turn Signal Flasher 31 Not Used 32 Power Locks -- Door Lock Relay, Remote Keyless Entry Receiver 33 DRL MDL -- Daytime Running Lamp Module, (S.E.O.) Accessory Switch 42 Evap. Sol. -- Evaporation Emissions (EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve 34 Not Used 43 Not Used 35 Not Used 44 Not Used 36 Not Used 45 Not Used 37 Rear Defog -- Rear Window Defogger Switch Relay 0The 1997 Chevrolet Lumina Owner’s Manual 1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tellsyou how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “air bag” system. 2-1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your Chevrolet. 3- 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5-1 Problems on the Road This section tells what todo if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your Chevrolet running properly and looking good. 7-1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use. 8-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you howto contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10. 9- 1 Index Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quicklyfind something you want to read. i We support voluntary technician certification. GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name LUMINAare registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation. This manual includesthe latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after thattime without further notice.For vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your Chevrolet,so it will be there if you ever needit when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manualit in so the new owner can use it. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 10292306 C First Edition ii 11 WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institutefor AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French LanguageManual: Aux proprigtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez votre concessionaireou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga, OntarioL5T 1C7 @CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved The dynamic William C. “Billy” Durant shified gears from making carriages to making cars, forming half the team thatgave birth to Chevrolet. Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team, at the wheel of his experimental “Classic Six, which enteredproduction in I912. That year 2999 vehicles were produced. ” I I the In 1932 Chevrolet introduced Synchro-Mesh transmission oflered a host of accessories -- including such niceties as clock! 1 and , - .a iv I I I \ The legacy of America'sfavorite sportscar began in 1953, when 31 9 hand-assembled Corvettes launched first use of a fiberglass body in a production car: ----------- ; I I ; I t I I I -1 the r""'-"--'-""" I I I I I I I I I . :, ..:: ~ The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American public -- and was poweredby an available fuel-injected V8. I I I I I 60's automotive excitement included Chevrolet landmarks like the Corvette Sting Ray, the sporty Camaro, and powerplants like the legendary 327 V8. Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value. V How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learnabout the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. Index A good place to look for what you need is the Index in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of all that’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it. Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. vi ’ A CAUTION: I I These mean thereis something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area,we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what todo to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt. A You will also find a circle with a slash throughit in this book.This safety symbol means “Don’t,” “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let thishappen.’’ Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this book you will find these notices: I NOTICE: These mean there is something thatcould damage your vehicle. In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what do to to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE. vii Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING A Q These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: These symbols have to do with your lamps: These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: WDSHIELD WIPER ee CAUSTIC BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER FASTEN SEAT BELTS BRAKE BURNS COOLANT AVOID SPARKS OR FLAMES WINDOW DEFOGGER ‘tl ENGINE OIL PRESSURE FLAME EXPLODE BATTERY viii FOG LAMPS #0 VENTILATING FAN ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Here are some other symbols you may see: k ENGINE TURN SIGNALS DOOR LOCK UNLOCK These symbols are on someof your controls: I-1 FUSE -%- LIGHTER (a) a HORN SPEAKER P m )a b e, p3 (a) FUEL 0Sectio-- 1 Seats andRestraint Systems Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly. You can a learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts. 1-2 1-6 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-19 1-20 1-20 1-26 1-27 Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts-- and the Answers How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Right Front Passenger Position Air Bag System Center Passenger Position Rear Seat Passengers 1-30 1-32 1-34 1-48 1-56 1-59 1-59 1-60 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Children Built-in Child Restraint (Option) Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1-1 Seats and Seat Controls This section tellsyou how to adjust the seatsand explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints. 2-Way Manual Front Seat I A CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicleis not moving. 1-2 Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and releasethe bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked into place. Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat (Option) The driver’s seatmay have a bar and a handle underthe front edge of the seat.Lift the barto unlock the seat and to slideit forward and backward. 1-3 Driver’s Side Power Seat (Option) Reclining Front Seatbacks FRONT (A): Raise the front of the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the frontof the seat. CENTER (B):Move theseat forward or backward by holding the control to the front or to the back. Raiseor lower the seat by holding the control up or down. REAR (C): Raise the rearof the seat by holding the switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the ofrear the seat. 1-4 Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the seatback to whereyou want it. Release the lever to lock the seatbackinto place. Pullup on the lever without pushing on the seatback, and the seatback will move forward. I But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Sitting ina reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motioncan be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’tdo their job when you’re reclined like this. The shoulder beltcan’t do its job because it won’t be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could gointo it, receiving neckor other injuries. The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crash the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright. Then well sit back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone This part of the manual tellsyou how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the air bag system. Don’t let anyoneride where heor she can’t wear a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if youare buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properlytoo. 1-6 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ain seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as areminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) Why Safety BeltsWork When you ride in oron anything, you go as fast as it goes. In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know ifit will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, andsome crashes can beso serious thateven buckled up a personwouldn’t surviveBut most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheel After more than25 years of safety beltsin vehicles, the facts are clear. Inmost crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! 1-7 I ". . " Put someone on it. 1-8 The rider Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. doesn't stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... or the instrument panel... Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts-- and the Answers I be trapped in the vehicle after an Q: Won’t accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if you are belted. If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to wear safety belts? A: or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts makesuch good sense. 1-10 Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future.But they are supplemental systems only;so they work with safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have tobuckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. @ If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn’t yourfault -- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protectyou from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h). Safety beltsare for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that thereare special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your Chevrolet, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. 1-11 Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s howwear to it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. I - 2. Adjust the seat(to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. * 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t letit get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly.If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 1-12 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t longenough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release buttonon the buckleis positioned so you wouldbe ableto unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt. The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. 1-13 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt for you. adjuster to the height that is right To move it down, squeeze the release lever and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster upjust by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release lever to make sure it has lockedinto position. Adjust the heightso that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. 1-14 &: What’s wrong with this? if your shoulder belt is You can be seriously hurt too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body. A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-15 What's wrong with this? You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltis buckled inthe wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you. - I ,- . n ! A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-16 @ What’s wrong with this? You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severelyinjure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-17 ~~ &.' What's wrong with this? You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces.aIf belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealer tofix it. I A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-18 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely be to seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts. To unlatch the belt,just push thebutton on the buckle. The belt should go back outof the way. Before you closethe door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion shouldbe worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 1-19 ~ The best way to protect the fetusis to protect the mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt.See “Driver Position,” earlier in this section. When the shoulder beltis pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let itgo back all theway and start again. Air Bag System This part explains theair bag system. -- one air bag for the Your Chevrolet has two air bags driver and anotherair bag for the right front passenger. Here are the most important things to know about air the bag system: 1-20 1 ~ ’c-A CAUTION: You can be severelyinjured or killed ina crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints’’ to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts,but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where thefront of your vehicle hits something. Theyaren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there’san air bag for that person. -- -- 1A rUTION: , Air bags inflate withgreat force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep youin position beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even withair bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol. AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells youif there is an electrical problem. See “Air BagReadiness Light” in the Index for more information. I An inflating air bag can seriouslyinjure small children. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, seethe part of this manual called “Children” and the caution label on the right front passenger’s safety belt. 1-21 I ~ How the Air Bag System Works 1 i L The right front passenger’sair bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. Where are the air bags? The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-22 IA CAUTIO If something is between an occupant and alr an bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. it can be somewhatabove or below this range.If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts,because inflation would not help the occupant. In any particularcrash, no one can say whether an air bag shouldhave inflated simplybecause of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. Inflation isdetermined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. What makes an air bag inflate? When should anair bag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash.The air bag willinflate only if theimpact speed is abovethe system’s designed “threshold level.”If your vehiclegoes straight into a wall that doesn’tmove or deform, the threshold levelis about 9 to 15 mph(14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicleis in a crash.The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag.The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger. 1-23 How does anair bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air bag inflates? After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize theair bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you maybe warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be somesmoke and dustcoming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing from or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. ~ When anair bag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get outas soon as itis safe to doso. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle afteran air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are brokenby vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occurfrom the right front passenger air bag. Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll needsome new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t getthem, the airbag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will includeair bag modules and possibly other parts.The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. 1-24 1 I e Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensingand diagnostic module, which recordsinformation about the air bag system.The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage atdeployment. e Let only qualified technicians workon your air bag system.Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly.See your dealer for service. Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet Air bags affect how yourChevrolet should be serviced. There are partsof the air bagsystem in several places around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.Your Chevrolet dealer and the Lumina Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. NOTICE: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly.You may have to replace the air bag module inthe steering wheel or both the air bag moduleand the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not openor break the air bag coverings. For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air bag can still inflateduring improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellowtape or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of the air bag system.Be sure to follow proper service procedures,and make sure the person performing work for you is qualifiedto do so. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-25 : Lap Belt If your vehicle has a bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. 1-26 Rear Seat Passengers It’s veryimportant for rear seatpassengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle ina crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions To make the belt shorter, pullits free end as shown until the beltis snug. Buckle, positionand release it the same way asthe lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety BeltExtender” at the end of this section. Make surethe release button on the buckleis positioned so you wouldbe able tounbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. U Lap-Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wearone properly. When the shoulder beltis pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does,let it go back all the wayand start again.If the beltis not long enough,see “Safety Belt Extender”at the endof this section. Make sure the release buttonon the buckleis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder beltmay lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull upon the latch plate to make sure it is secure. 1-28 3. To make the lap part tight, pull downon the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid underit, the belt would applyforce at your abdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. I I The lap partof the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies /. CAULON: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose.In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 1-29 There isone guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children whohave outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: To unlatch the belt,just push the buttonon the buckle. Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfortfor children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installedaon shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head. 1-30 1. Pull the elastic cord outfrom between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip. 2. Slide the guide under and pastthe belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the beltis not twisted andit lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top. 1-31 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. In’fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to someage must be restrained while ina vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies Smaller children and babies should always be restrained ina child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is the right type and size for yourchild. A very 4. Buckle, position and release the safety beltas described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” young child’s hip bones are so small thata regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe belt crosses the shoulder. child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt force right on the child’s abdomen, which could edges togetherso that you can take them out from the cause seriousor fatal injuries.So, be sure that guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and any child small enoughfor one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint. clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed. 1-32 A heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would bealmost impossible to hold. Secure the baby in an infant restraint. A CAUTION: Never holda baby in yourarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a crash. During a crash a baby will becomeso CAUTION: (Continued) -- 1-33 Built-in Child Restraint (Option) restraint system conforms to all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. This child restraintis designed for use only by children who weigh between22 and 60 pounds (10 and 27 kg) and whose heightis between 33.5 and 5 1 inches (850 and 1 295 mm) and who are capable of sitting upright alone. The child should also be at least one year old. is It important to usea rear-facing infant restraint until the child is about a year old. A rear-facing restraint gives the infant’s head, neck and body the support they would need in a crash. See “Child Restraints” later in this section for more information. If your vehicle has this option, there’s a built-in child restraint in the center rear seat position. This child 1-34 Which slots should I use for my child? A: With the child seated on the child restraint cushion, use the pair of slots that is at or just above the top of the child’s shoulders. With this built-in child restraint, youcan adjust the height of the harness.Depending on the seated height of the child, you can route it through the upper pair of slots (A), the middle pair of slots (B) or the lower pair of slots (C). For the child shown here, the harness shouldgo through the middle pairof slots (B). 1-35 &: What if the top ofmy child’s shoulders isabove the highest pair of slots? A: A child whose shoulders are abovethe highest slots shouldn’t use this child restraint. Instead, the child should siton the vehicle’s seat cushion and use the vehicle’s safety belts. MAKE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD’S SHOULDERS IS BELOW THE SLOTS THAT THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH. A CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ARE ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A SUDDEN STOP ORCRASH. IF THE TOP OF THECHILD’S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS, DON’T USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT. INSTEAD, THE CHILDSHOULD SIT ON THE VEHICLE’S REGULAR SEAT AND USE THE REGULAR SAFETY BELTS. 1-36 Adjusting the Harness Height 1. Lower the child restraint cushion. c 2. If the left and right halves of the shoulder harness clip are fastened together, separatethem. 3. If the lap-shoulder harness is buckled, unlatchit by pushing the button on the buckle. 1-37 4. Pull down the seatback partof the pad (D). 1-38 5. Select one side of the harness. Add some slack to the shoulder partby pulling up on the lap part. You’ll keep most of this slack until you finishStep 9. .. , 6. Feed a small amount of harness slack back into the slot. 7. Twist the harness slightly to remove it from the slot. I 8. Move the harness up or down to the correct slot. The correct slot isthe one that will be ator just above the top of the child’s shoulder. 1-39 10. Pull on the harness. Make sureisitproperly routed and isn’t twistedor flipped over. 11. Repeat Steps 5 through 10 for the other side of the harness.Be sure both sides are adjusted to the same height. 12. Move the pad back against the child restraint seatback. Make sure the harness goes through the slots in the pad that match the height adjustment slots being used. 13. Press the upperedge of the pad against the fastener strip. 9. Twist the harness slightly to routeit through the correct slot. 1-40 Securing a Child in the Built-in Child Restraint Don’t use the vehicle’s safety belts. I c Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts ona child seated onthe child restraint cushion can cause serious injury to the child ina sudden stop or crash. If a child isthe proper size for the built-in child restraint, secure the child using the child restraint’s harness. But children who are too large for the built-in childrestraint should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat and use the regular safety belts. Now that the harness is adjusted to the correct height for your child, you’re ready to use the child restraint’s harness (E) to secure your child. WARNING! FAILURE TO FOLLOWTHE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ONTHE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKINGTHE VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURINGA SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH. SNUGLY ADJUSTTHE BELTS PROVIDED WITH THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUNDYOUR CHILD. 1-41 1. If the left and right halvesof the shoulder harness clip are fastened together, separate them. 2. If the lap-shoulder harnessis buckled, unlatchit by pushing the button on the buckle. 3. Place the child on the child restraint cushion. 1-42 Be sure the buckleis free of any foreign objects that may prevent youfrom securing the latch plates. If you can’t securea latch plate, see your Chevrolet dealer for service before using the child restraint. 6. In a single motion,pull the other sideof the harness all theway out. Keeping the harness pulled all the way out, place it over the child’s shoulder. 4. Select only one sideof the harness. Pull thelap part of the harness out, and place the harness over the child’s shoulder. If both sidesof the harness are pulled out, the lap parts will lock. If the lap parts lock, let both sidesof the harness go back all theway so each side will move freely again. Then repeat this step, pulling only oneside of the harness out. 5. Push the latch plate(Q into the buckle untilit clicks. 7. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks. 1-43 Pull an both latch plafesto make sure they are secure.A green indicator will show in each latchplate window (G). If the harnesslocks before the latch plate reaches the buckle, let the harness ga all the way back so it will move freely again. Then repeat Steps 6 and 7. Be sure to k p tbe harness pulledall the way out until you buckle it. Once both sides af the lap-shoulder harness are pulled out of the retractor and buckled,the harness will. lock. 8. Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder harness clip together. The indicator window(H) on the clip will show green when the two halves are fastened together. The purposeof this clip is to help keep the harness positioned on the child’s shoulders. A CAUTION: I An unfastened shoulder harness clip won’t help keep the harnessin place on the child’s shoulders.If the harness isn’t on the child’s shoulders, it won’t be able to restrain the child’s upper i body n a sudden stopor crash. The child could be seriouslyinjured. Make sure the harness clipis properly fastened. 1-44 9. On both sidesof the harness, pull up on the lap part a little to be sure it’s locked. If theharness isn’t locked, orif it becomes too tight, unfasten the harness clip. Then unlatch the harness by pushing the button on the buckle, andlet both sides of the harness go all the way back so they will move freely again.Then, repeat Steps 4 through 8. If the harness still doesn’t lock, don’t use the child restraint. See your dealer tohave the built-in child restraint serviced. 10. Adjust the positionof the harness on the child’s shoulders by movingthe clip up or down along the harness. On each side of the harness, the shoulder part should be centeredon the child’s shoulder.The harness shouldbe away from the child’s face and neck, but not fallingoff the child’s shoulders. 1-45 Removing the Child from the Built-in Child Restraint 2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on the buckle. 1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clin 1-46 3. Move one sideof the harness off the child's shoulder, and letthe harness go all the way back. 4. Move the other sideof the harness off the child's shoulder, and letit go all theway back. 5. Remove the childfrom the child restraint cushion. Storing the Built-in Child Restraint Always properly store the built-in child restraint before using the vehicle’s lap belt in the center rear seat position. 1. Buckle the harness and fasten the harness clip. 4. Then press the leg rest firmly intothe seatback, and secure it by pressing the upper corners against the fastener strips on the seatback. 2. Fold the child restraintcushion and leg rest up into the seatback. 3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback. Just like theother restraint systemsin your vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be periodically checked and may need tohave parts replaced after a crash. See “Checking Your Restraint Systems” and “Replacing Seat and RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash” in the Index. 1-47 Child Restraints Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions thatcome with the infantor child restraint will show you howto dothat. Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why: 1-48 ’ A child in a rear-facing childrestraint canbe seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rearfacing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rearseat. You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Before you secure a forward-facingchild restraint, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. Or, secure the child restraint in the rear seat. Top Strap A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badlyinjured by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates. Never securea child restraint m the center front seat. It’s alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat,but only with the seat moved all the way back. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in a collision orsudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle-- even when no child is in it. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need tohave an anchor installed, you can ask yourChevrolet dealer toput it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how todo it. Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. 1-49 If your child restraint has a top strap, your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designed for this vehicle. The dealer can then install the anchorfor you. In Canada, this work will bedone for you free of charge or, you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position u You'll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part about the top strapif the child restraint has one. 1. Put the restrainton the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 2. Secure the childin the child restraint asthe instructions say. 1-50 4. Buckle the belt. Makesure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions tobe sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freelyagain and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear SeatPosition See the earlier part about the top strap if child the restraint has one. n You’ll be using thelap belt. A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured by the right front passenger air bagif it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, only but with the seatmoved all theway back. 1. Make the belt as longas possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-52 4. Run the vehicle’s safetybelt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 6. To tighten the belt, pullits free end while you push down on the child restraint. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sureit is secure.If it isn’t, secure the restraintin a different placein the vehicle and contact the child restraint makerfor their advice about how to attachthe child restraint properly. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. ’ Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbucklethe safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. Your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why: ‘ I 4. Pick up the latch plate,and fun the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint.The child restraintinstructions will showyou how. If the shoulder belt goes in .front of the child’sface or neck, put it behind the child restraint, A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of a rearfacing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always securerearfacing a child restraint in the rear seat. You’ll be usingthe lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat far as back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.(See “Seats” in the Index.) 2. Put the restrainton the seat. Follow the instructions for the child restraint. 3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say. 1-54 5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif you ever had to. . 6. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor to setthe lock. .... ..- 7. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt into backthe retractor while you push down on the child restraint. 8. Push and pullthe child restraint in different directions to be sureit is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and letit go back allthe way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to workfor an adult or larger child passenger. 1-55 Larger Children F.lll If you have the choice,a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly. Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown outin a crash. Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other people who are. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safetybelts. 1-56 Never do this. Here twochildren are wearing the same belt. The belt can’tproperly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time. &: A: What if a child is wearinga lap-shoulder belt, but the child isso small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s faceor neck? Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body If the would have the restraint that belts provide. child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” the in Index. If the childis so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’sface or neck, you might want to place the childin the center seat position, the one that has only alap belt. 1-57 JTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child.If the child wearsthe belt in thisway, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force wouldthen be appliedright on the child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snugon the hips,just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in acrash. 1-58 Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should useit. Now and then, make surethe safety beltreminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly.If your vehiclehas a built-in child restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If you see anything that might keepa safety belt or built-in child restraint system from doing its job, have it repaired. But if a safety belt isn’t longenough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, takethe heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be longenough for you. The extender will be just for you, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t letsomeone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ain crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, geta new one right away. If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn or frayed harness strapscan rip apart underimpact forces just like tornor frayed safety belts can. They may not protect a child in a crash. If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a new harness right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-59 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash,do you need new safety belts or built-in child restraint parts? After a very minor collision, nothingmay be necessary. But if the safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps were stretched,as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you need new safety belts or harness straps. 1-60 If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness straps are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave safety belt, built-in child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairsmay be necessary even if the safety belt or built-in child restraint wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts.See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section, a Section 2 Features and Controls Here youcan learn about the many standard and optional features on your Chevrolet, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly-- and what todo if you have a problem. 2-2 2-4 2-6 2-9 2-10 2-1 1 2-13 2-13 2- 14 2-15 2-16 2-20 2-2 1 2-24 2-25 2-25 Keys Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped) Tntllk Theft PASS-Key@I1 New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater (Option) Automatic Transaxle Operation Parking Brake Shifting IntoPARK (P) Shifting Outof PARK (P) Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-34 2-35 2-37 2-39 2-4 1 2-4 1 2-42 2-43 2-44 2-46 2-49 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked Windows Horn Tilt SteeringWheel Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Ashtrays and Lighter Sun Visors Auxiliary Power Connection Sunroof (Option) Instrument Panel -- Your Information System Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators Keys a CAUTION: Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with young children. 2-2 1 The ignition keys are The ignition keys don’thave plugs. Your Chevrolet dealer or Roadside Assistance has the code for your keys. Each plug has code a on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra door keys. Keep the plugsin a safe place.If you lose your door keys, you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using these plugs. The door keys are for the If you need a new ignition key, contact your Chevrolet dealer who can obtainthe correct key code, or, in an emergency, callChevrolet Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). I NOTICE: When a new Chevrolet is delivered, the dealer removes the plugs from the door keys and gives them to the first owner. ’1 Your Chevrol.et has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can ahave lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to getin.So be sure you have extra keys. Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Passengers especialIy children can easily open thedoors and fall out. Whena door is locked, the insidehandle won’t open it. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. This may not beso obvious: You increase the chance of being thrownout of the vehicle ina crash if the doorsaren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors,and you will be far better off whenever youdrive your vehicle. -- -- There are several ways tolock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless entry transmitter if your vehicle hasthis option. 2-4 From the inside, push the lever to lock the door manually. To unlock, pull the lever. k Power DoorLocks To use the rear door security locks: Press the powerdoor lock switch tolock or unlock all doors. The rear doors do not have power door lock switches. The lever on each reardoor works only that door’s lock. It won’t lock or unlock all the doors. Rear Door SecurityLocks When these locksare set, the insidedoor handles will not open the rear doors. Be sure to let adults and older cluldrenknow how the,locks work and how to cancel them. 1. Open the rear door. Use a key to move the leverall the way up. 2. Close the door. 3. Do the same thing on the other rear door. To open a door when the security locks are set, unlock the doorfrom the inside andthen open the door using If you want to cancel the the outside door handle. security locks, move the lever down. 3.-c 1-U Leaving Your Vehicle I If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. Remote Keyless Entry(If Equipped) If your Chevrolet hasthis option, youcan lock and unlock your doorsor unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to30 feet (9 m) away using theremote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. Your remote keyless entry transmitter operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry and Science Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may notcause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210of Industry and Science Canada. Operationis subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) this device may notcause interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operationof the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normalfor any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehiclefor the transmitter to work, try this: Check to determineif battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions that follow. Check the distance.You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Takea few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again. If you’re still having trouble,see your Chevrolet dealer or a qualified technician for service. Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle Operation Press UNLOCK once to unlock the driver’s door. Press UNLOCK again within five seconds to unlock all remaining doors; pressing UNLOCK will also cause the vehicle’s interior lamps to come on for a period of time--(see “Sustained Interior Illumination” in the Index for more details). Each remote keyless entry transmitteris coded to prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must alsobe matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter willnot unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle canhave only four transmitters matched toit. To lock both doors, pressLOCK. To unlock the trunk, press the trunksymbol on the transmitter. The trunk will only unlock if your transaxleis in PARK (P); pressing LOCK or thetrunk symbol will alsocause the vehicle’s interior lamps to come on for a period of time--(see “Sustained Interior Illumination”in the Index for more details). 2-7 Battery Replacement Under normaluse, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last abouttwo years. You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal rangein any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time tochange the battery. For battery replacement, use type CR2032or an equivalent. I NOTICE: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch To replace the battery: any of the circuitry. Static from your body 1. Insert a flat object like dime a into the slot on the back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the front transferred to these surfaces may damage and back. the transmitter. 2. Remove the battery and replaceit with the new one, making sure the positive (+) side of the batteryis facing down. 3. Snap the top and bottom together; make sure the halves are together tightly so water won’t getin. 4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing the transmitter with your receiver, (located in your vehicle). 2-8 Synchronization Synchronization may be necessarydue to the security method used by this remote keyless entry system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.The receiver will not respond to a signal it has previously been sent.This prevents someone from recording andplaying back the signal from the transmitter. To resynchronize the transmitter withthe receiver, do the following: While standing close to your vehicle, simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for about five seconds. The door locks should cycle (lock and unlock) toconfirm synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your dealer for service. Trunk I A C’ WTION: It can be dangerous to drivewith the trunklid open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gascan come intoyour vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If you must drivewith the trunk lid openor if electrical wiringor other cable connections must pass through theseal between the body and the trunk lid: Make sure all windows are shut. l b r n the fan on your heatingor cooling system to its highest speedwith the setting on VENT. That will force outsideair into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index. 0 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See ‘(Engine Exhaust” in the Index. 2-9 Trunk Lock ~ ; ~ ", ~ , , I": ~ .V.? 4 ,, i . . , ,, / , x "'%.E.l," L * I , , . - . ~ Remember, your trunk canbe opened at any time using this lock release, so be sure to lock your doors. +' ., . "' i ' , To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the door key and turnit. You can also use the remote keyless entry function if your vehicle has this option. Just press the trunk symbol on the transmitter, making sure your shift leveris in PARK (P). Remote Trunk Release (Option) Press the button under the instrument panel on the driver's side. Your transaxle shift lever must be in PARK (P). 2-10 Theft Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Although your Chevrolet has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put it oncan make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help. Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it's an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so don't do it. When you park your Chevrolet and open the driver's door, you'll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and takeit with you. Alwaysdo this. Your steering wheel willbe locked, andso will your ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors. Parking at Night Park in a lightedspot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember tokeep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area,or take them with you. Parking Lots If you parkin a lot wheresomeone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. But whatif you have to leave your ignitionkey? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? Put your valuables in a storage area, like yourtrunk or glove box. Lock the glove box. 0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s. P A S S - K ~ ~11@ Your vehicle isequipped with the PASS-Key I1 (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key I1 is a passive theft-deterrent system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition. PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that matches adecoder in your vehicle. Then take the door key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you. 2-11 i - When the PASS-KeyI1 system senses that someoneis using the wrong key,it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter won’t work and fuel won’tgo to the engine.If someone tries to start your vehicle againor uses another key during this time, the vehicle will not start. This discourages someonefrom randomly trying different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make a match. The ignition key mustbe clean and dry before it’s inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the engine does not start and the SECURITY light on, is the key may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off. If you accidentallyuse a key that has a darnaged or missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work and the SECURITY light will comeon. But you don’t haveto wait three minutes before trying another ignition key. See your Chevrolet dealeror a locksmith who can service the PASS-KeyI1 to have a new key made. If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your Chevrolet dealer.Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key I1 system. If you loseor damage a PASS-KeyI1 ignition key, see Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes andtry your Chevrolet dealeror a locksmith who can service again. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made. an In emergency, to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center at another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your vehicle needs service.If your vehicle doesstart, the first ignition key may be faulty.See your Chevrolet dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key 11. 2-12 Ignition Positions New Vehicle “Break-In” NOTICE: Your modern Chevroletdoesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: Don’t drive at any one speed fast or slow for thefirst 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 200 miles (322km) orso. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for more information. -- -- With the ignition keyin the ignition switch, youcan turn the switch to five positions: ACC (A): This position lets you use things like the radio and windshield wipers when theengine is off. To use ACC, push in the key and turnit toward you. Your steering wheel will stay locked. LOCK (B):Before you put the key into the ignition switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s also the only position in which you can remove your key.This position locks It’s a your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. theft-deterrent feature. 2-13 OFF (C): This position lets youturn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel.It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK.Use OFF if you must have your Move your vehicle pushed or towed. RUN @): This position is where thekeyreturns after yau start your vehicle. With the engineoff, you can use RUN to display someof your warning and indicator lights. START (E):This position starts your engine. A waning chime will soundif you open the driver’s door when theignition is in OFF,LOCK or ACC and the key is in the ignition. NOTICE: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, besure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition. switch.If none of this works, thenyour vehicle needs service. 2-14 Starting Your &@e shift lever to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start other any position in -- that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. I NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)if your Chevrolet is moving. If you do,you could damage the transaxle, Shiftto PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. 1. Without pushingthe accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key toSTART.When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm. NOTICE: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can damage yourstarter motor. 2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops),it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as youhold the key in START for up to 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Engine CoolantHeater (Option) NOTICE: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual thattells how to do it without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle’’ in the Index. In very cold weather,0”F (- 18O C) or colder, the engine coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To Use the Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcoTd, located behind the vehicle’s passenger side headlamp fixture. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet. Automatic TransaxleOperation 1 Plugging thecord intoan ungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon't reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keepit away from moving engine parts.If you don't, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer dependson the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, weask that you contact your Chevrolet dealer in the area where you'll be parking your vehicle.The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. 2-16 Your automatic transaxle mayhave a shift lever on the steering column or on the console between the seats. Maximum engine speedis limited on automatic transaxle vehicles, whenyou're in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline componentsfrom improper operation. There are several different positions for your shift lever. PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best position to use whenyou start yourengine because your vehicle can’t move easily. ’ ~ It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index.If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index. Make sure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your Chevrolet hasa brake-transaxle shift interlock.You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shft out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the shft lever button if you havea console shift. Then move theshift lever out of PARK(P), being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after yourvehicle is stopped. To rock your vehicle back and forth to out get of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index. 2-17 NEUTRAL (N): In this position, yourengine doesn’t connect withthe wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed. AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@):This position is for normal driving.If you need more power for passing, and you’re: Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator pedal all theway down. Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis “racing” (running at high speed)is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing. NOTICE: Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty. 2-18 You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. NOTICE: If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or if it seems not to shift gears you as go faster, something maybe wrong with your transaxle; your vehicle may default toSECOND (2). However if you drive very far that way, your vehicle can be damaged.So if this happens, have your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (03) for higherspeeds. DRIVE (D): This position is also used for normal driving, butit offers more power andlower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@). Here are some times you mightchoose DRIVE (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@): 0 When driving on hilly, winding roads. 0 When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears. 0 When going down a steep hill. SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, butthen you would alsowant to use your brakes off and on. NOTICE: Don’t drivein SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles (41 km) at speeds over55 mph (88 kmk), or you can damage your transaxle. Use DRIVE(D) orAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0) as much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are going slower than65 mph (105 kmk), or you can damage your engine. 2-19 FIRST (1): This position givesyou even more power (but lower fuel economy) thanSECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud.If the shift lever is putin FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift into first gear untilthe vehicle isgoing slowly enough. I NOTICE: If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This mighthappen if you werestuck in very deepsand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This couldoverheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to holdyour vehicle in position ona hill. 2-20 Parking Brake To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your rightfoot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position. NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to replace them, andyou could also damage other parts of your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” inthe Index. That section shows what todo first to keepthe trailer from moving. Shifting Into PARK (P) 1 A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get outof your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) ivith the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, vehicle the can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex. 2-21 I Column Shift 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever intoPARK (P) position like this: Move the lever upas far as it will go. 3. Move the ignition keyto LOCK. 4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P). Pull the lever toward you. 2-22 ! I Console Shift 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake. Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running 2. Move the shift leverinto PARK (P) position like this: Hold in the buttonon the lever, and push the lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle. 3. Move the ignition key to LOCK. 4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can leave your vehicle withthe ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). It canbe dangerous toleave your vehicle with the engine running.Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat andeven catch fire.You or otherscould be injured.Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine runningunless you have to. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK(P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into the PARK (P) position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you (or, if you have the console shift lever, without first pushing the button). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P). 2-23 Torque Lock Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you are parhng on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle.You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find outhow, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If torque locK does occur,you may needto nave another vehicle push yours little a uphill to take some of the pressure from the parlung pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Your Chevrolet has a brake-transaxle shift interlock. You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift leverby pushing it all theway into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the shift lever buttonif you have aconsole shift. Then move the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sure to press the shift lever buttonif you have a console shift. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift outof PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the key to OFF. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the engine and shift tothe drive gear you want. 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. I 2-24 Parking Over Things That Burn .......... .. -0. I. I..,. Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don't park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: 0 Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. 0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. 0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. Repairs weren't done correctly. Your vehicle or exhaustsystem had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out anyCO; and 0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately. Running Your Engine While You’re Parked A CAUTION: It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here aresome things to know. I A CAUTION: Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”). Also, idling in a closed-in placecan let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the fanswitch is at the highestsetting. One place this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard. (See “Blizzard” in theIndex.) -- 1 2-26 -- It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always setyour parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move, See “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. If you are parking ona hill and if you’re pullinga trailer, alsosee “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Window. On a vehicle wlm manual windows, use the window crank to open andclose each window. Power Windows (Option) The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the bottom of the switch, and the driver’s window will open a small amount. If the bottomof the switch is pressed all the way down, the window willgo all the way down. To stop the window while itis lowering, pressthe front of the switch. To raise the window, pressand hold the front of the switch. The driver’s window controlsalso include a lock-out switch. PressLOCK OUT to stopfront and rear passengers from using their window switches.The driver can still control all the windows with the lock on. Press the switch againfor normal operation. When the orange band onthe switch is showing, the passengers can operate their windows. Horn Press onor along the top edgeof your steering wheel horn symbolsto sound the horn. Switches on the driver’sdoor armrest control eachof the windows when the ignitionis on. In addition, each of the passenger’s doors has a switch for itsown window. 2-27 Tilt Steering Wheel A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel beforeyou drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever as pictured. Movethe steering wheel toa comfortable level, then release the lever lock to the wheel in place. 2-28 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward(for right) and two downward (for left) positions.These positions allow you to signal a turnor a lane change. To signal a turn, movethe lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. An arrowon the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. As you signal a turnor a lane change,if the arrow flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all when you signal a turn,check for burned-out bulbs and check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index). Headlamp High/LowBeam To change your headlamps from low beamto high beam, or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, a light on the instrument panelalso will be on. To signal alane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete yourlane change. The lever will returnby itself when you releaseit. 2-29 v WIPER I For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to LO. For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF. You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wipes.This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band tochoose the delay time.The closer toLO, the shorter the delay. In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. 2-30 : I I When you apply your brakes, thecruise control shuts off. Cruise Control (If Equipped) t I 0 0 Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.This can really help onlong trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). 2-31 Resuming a Set Speed Setting Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This shutsoff the cruise control, but you don't need to reset it when you want to resume your previous speed. I If you leave your cruise control switch on when a button and you're not using cruise, you might hit go into cruisewhen you don't want to.You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch OFF until you wantto use it. 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Push in theSET button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal. 2-32 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your footoff the pedal, your vehicle will slow down tothe cruise control speed youset earlier. 1. Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push theSET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at thehigher speed. 2. Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to WA. Each time you do this, your vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster). The accelerate feature will only work after you set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways toreduce your speed while using cruise control: 0 Push in the SET button until you reachthe lower speed you want, then release it. 0 To slow down in very smallamounts, push the SET button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well yourcruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, loadand the steepnessof the hills. When goingup steep hills, you mayhave to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you mayhave to brakeor shift to alower gear to keep yourspeed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control: 0 Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR 0 Move the cruise switch to OFF. Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn offthe cruise control orthe ignition, or shift intoPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise control set speed memoryis erased. 2-33 Exterior Lamps SidemarkerLamps 0 InstrumentPanelLights CourtesyLamps -:q-Turn the knob to this symbol (C) to turn on the headlamps and other operating lamps. PC Turn the knob to this symbol(B) to turn on the parking and other operating lamps without the headlamps. Turn the knob toOFF to turn off the lamps. A warning chime will sound when you turn the ignition switch to OFF, LOCK or ACC with the lampson. Daytime Running LampdAutomatic Headlamp Control The lamp controls are onthe instrument panel. They control these systems: Headlamps Taillamps ParkingLamps LicenseLamps 2-34 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. A light sensoron top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when: 1 0 The ignition ison, 0 The headlamp switch is off and 0 The parking brake is released. When the DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps willbe on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. When it’s dark enough outside, your low-beam headlamps will change to full brightness. The other lamps thatcome on with your headlamps willalso come on. When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go out, and your low-beam headlampschange to the reduced brightness of DRL. Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness Control You can brightenor dim the instrument panel lamps by moving the dial (A). If you turn the dial all the way up, your courtesyor interior lamps willcome on. Courtesy Lamps When any door is opened, several lamps come on. These lamps are courtesy lamps.They make it easy for you to enter and leave your vehicle.You can also turn these lamps on by moving the dial near the headlamp knob all the way up. Some of the lamps have switches so you can turn them on, even when the doors are closed. These lamps are reading lamps. To avoid draining your battery, sure be to turn off all reading lamps when leaving your vehicle. To idle your vehicle withthe DRL off, set the parking brake whilethe ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start your vehicle.The DRL will stayoff until you release the parking brake. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. 2-35 Sustained Interior Illumination Your courtesy lamps willcome on and stayon for a set time whenever you: 0 Open a door. 0 Press UNLOCK onthe remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped). 0 Press LOCK on theremote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped). 0 Press the trunk symbol on theremote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped). open If you open a door, thelamps will stay on while it’s and then turn off automaticallyabout 18 seconds after you close it. If you don’t open a door, the lamps will turn off after about18 seconds, unless you press 2-36 UNLOCK or TRUNKon the remote keyless e n q transmitter. If you press UNLOCKor TRUNK and don’t open a door, the lamps will turn off after about 55 seconds. If you press LOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the lamps will turn off about 17 seconds after all thedoors are closed. Sustained interior illumination includes a feature called theater dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just turn off at the endof the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim during the delay time until theygo out. The delay time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to RUN or START, so the lamps willgo out right away. When the ignition is on, sustained interior illumination is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on, Rearview MirrorReading Lamps Battery Saver Your vehcle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the courtesy lamps on.If you leave the dial turnedall the way up, orif you leave adoor open, thelamps will automatically turnoff after 10 minutes ifthe ignition is off. These lamps go on when you open the doors. When the doors are closed,turn the lamps on and off with the switches. Manual Outside Mirrors Adjust the right mirror by hand. To adjust the left mirror, move theknob in the directionyou want to move the mirror. To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, push the lever forward (to the night position). To return the mirror to the day position, pull the lever toward you. 2-38 Power Outside Mirrors(If Equipped) The power mirror controlis on the driver's door. Turn the control to the left to adjust theleft rnirror orto the rightto adjust the right mirror. Then move the control in the direction you want to move the mirror. Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger’s sidemirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Storage Armrest To use the storage area, fold down the armrest. Press the latch on the front edge and pull up. To use the cupholder, flip it forward. A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before Instrument Panel Cupholder changing lanes. To use this cupholder, slide it out of the instrument panel. Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the door key to lock and unlock theglove box. To open, lift the latch. 2-39 Door Storage Compartments Convenience Net (Option) Each of the doors has a storage compartment. Center Console '1 Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You'll see it just inside the backwall of the trunk. To open the storage area, press the button and lift the cover. The consolehas a cassette and CD storage bin and a cupholder. To use the cupholder for large cups, remove the insert. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them fiom falling over during'sharpturns or quick startsand stops. The net isn't for larger, heavier loads. Storethem in the trunk as far forward as you can. You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you're not using it. 2-40 Ashtrays and Lighter The center front ashtray may beon the instrument panel or on the console. To remove the instrument panel ashtray, open it, push down on the locking taband pull out the ashtray. For the console ashtray, openthe lid and lift out the ashtray using the snuffer. NOTICE: Don't hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating.If you do,it won't be able to back away fromthe heating element when it's ready. That can makeit overheat, damagingthe lighter and the heating element. Your vehicle mayhave a rear ashtray.It is located within a small doorat the rear of your console or rear of your front seat storage armrest. Push on the right of side the Sun Visors door. The ashtray will then rotate to the right for usage. You You can only access the ashtray by pushing on the door's To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. can also move themfrom side to side. right side.To remove the ashtray, push down on the snuffer located in the middle of the ashtray and lift it out. Visor Vanity Mirrors NOTICE: Don't put papers and other things that burninto your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage. To use the lighter, just push it in all theway and let go. When it's ready, it will pop back by itself. 2-41 Open thecover to expose the vanity mirror. Forthe driver’s mirror, slide thecover to the side. For the passenger’s mirror,lift the cover.The lamps will come on when you open the coveron the passenger’s visor. Floor Mats (Option) 3. Use a screwdriver to screw the locator post into the vehicle’s carpeting. Press down while turning to allow the locator “auger point” to pierce the floor carpet. The locator will not screw down tightly, but will rotate freely when installed properly. Usage 4. To remove the mat, pullup on the rearof the mat to B). un-snap itfrom the locator post (see view 5. To re-install the mat, align the grommet in the mat over the locator post and push down to snap the mat into place (see viewB). I Auxiliary Power Connection ~ View A View B Installation 1. Move the driver’s seat toits most rearward position. 2. Locate the driver’s side floor matin the vehicle with the rear of the mat against theleft (outboard) front A). edge of the seat track mounting bracket (see view Il i Your vehicle isequipped with auxiliary power leads. These leads can be used to power aftermarket electrical equipment added to your vehicle. They are located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, below the glove box and behind whatis referred to as a “hush panel.” For additional informationon accessing these leads and electrical hookup, please refer to your service manual. NOTICE: Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damageit or keep other things from working as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything that exceeds the fuse rating. Sunroof (Option) Your sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a sliding sunshade. The sunroof switch is located between the sun visors just ahead of the sunroof and works only when the ignition is on. To open the glass panel and sunshade, press the rear of the switch.Let go of the switchto stop the panelin any position. Press thefront of the switch toclose the glass panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand. The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if your vehicle has an electrical failure. 2-43 Instrument Panel -- Your Information System !-44 A.Vents E. Audio System B. Instrument Cluster E Ashtray and Lighter C. Climate ControVRear Defogger G. Remote Trunk Release D. Glove Box H. Lamp Controls 2-45 Instrument Panel Cluster TEMPERATURE SECURITY Standard Cluster: United States Version Shown, Canadian Similar Your instrument clusteris designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’llknow how fast you’re going, about how much fuel is in your tank and manyother things you need to drive safely and economically. 2-46 Optional Cluster: United States Version Shown, Canadian Similar 2-47 Speedometer/Odometer Tachometer Your speedometer letsyou see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows howfar your vehicle has been driven in either miles (used in the United States) or in kilometers (used inCanada). Your Chevrolet has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you see silver lines between the numbers, you’ll know someone has probably tampered with it and the numbers may not be correct. You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed.If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then that is what will be done.If it can’t, then it will be set at zero anda label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when thenew odometer was installed. Trip Odometer Your trip odometer tells howfar you have driven since you last resetit. To set it to zero, press the reset button. 2-48 The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). \ 1, RPM I NOTICE: Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur. Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle.The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gagescan signal that somethingis wrong beforeit becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repairor replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem withone of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lightscome on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working.If you are familiar with this section, you should notbe alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicate when there may beor is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on when youare driving, or whenone of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The safety belt light will also come on and stayon until the driver’s belt is buckled. 2-49 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIRBAG or the air bag symbol. The system checks theair bag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes theair bag sensors, the air bag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag system,see “Air Bag” inthe Index. AIR BAG This light willcome on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the systemis ready. If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. 2-50 The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds whenyou turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light doesn’tcome on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. Charging System Light VOLTS The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition,as a checkto show you it’s working. Then it should go out. If it stays on,or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could indicate that you have a loose drive belt or another electrical problem. Haveit checked right away. Driving while this lightis on could drain your battery. If you must drive ashort distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. Brake System Warning Light Your Chevrolet’s hydraulic brake systemis divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other partcan still work andstop you. For good braking, though, you need bothparts working well. If the warning light comes on,there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. BRAKE This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn youif there’s a problem. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push. Or,the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, or if the anti-lock brake system warning lightis flashing, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 1 Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light ison still or if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing after you’ve pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. When the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light will alsocome on when you set your parking brake. The light will stayon if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brakeis fully released, it means youhave a brake problem. 2-51 I _- Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light (Option) ANTI LOCK With the anti-lock brake system, this light willcome on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds. That’s normal. Your regular brake system may not be working properly if the anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock brake system warning light flashing can lead to an accident. After you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn on anti-lock brakes and there could be a problem with yourthe ignitionoff. Or, if the light comes on and stays when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn regular brakes. Pulloff the road and stop carefully. You the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. while you’re driving, your Chevrolet needs service. If Have the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your the lightis on but not flashingand the regular brake Vehicle’’ in the Index.) system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’thave anti-lock brakes. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition keyRUN. to If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn youif there is a problem. 2-52 Anti-Lock Brake System Active Light (Option) LOW TRAC When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, the anti-lock brake system active light willcome on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly. The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system stops adjusting brake pressure. The anti-lock brake system active lightalso comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’tcome on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the systemis active. Engine Coolant Temperature Light 1 This light tells you that your engine coolant has overheated or your radiator cooling fan( s) HOT If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” inthe Index. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage n You have a gage that shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves intothe red area, yourengine is too hot! That reading means thesame thing as the warning light. It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle andturn off the engine as soonas possible. In “Problems on the Road”, this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. 2-54 ow Coolant Warning Light LOW COOLANT If this lightcomes on, your system is low on coolant and theengine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soonas you can. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) SERVICE ENGINE SOON I Your Chevrolet is equipped with acomputer which monitors operationof the fuel, ignition andemission control systems. This system is called OBDI1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there aisproblem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. This light shouldcome on, as acheck to show youit is working, whenthe ignition is on andthe engine is not running. If the light doesn’tcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunctionin one of two ways: 0 0 Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service is required. Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. 2-55 If the LightIs Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: 0 Reducing vehicle speed. 0 Avoiding hard accelerations. 0 Avoiding steep uphill grades. 0 If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashingand remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. 1 If the light continuesto flash, when itis safe todo so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the keyoff, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remainson steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer ox qualified service centerfor service. 2-56 I If the LightIs On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap.The diagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allowfuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Did you just drive through adeep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turn the light off. Have you recentlychanged brands of fuel? Oil Warning Light If so, be sure tofuel your vehicle with qualityfuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poorfuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected bythe system and cause the light to turnon. If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will requireat least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off. If none of the above steps have made the light turnoff, have your dealeror qualified service centercheck the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. 7 3 If you have a problem with your oil, this light may stay on after you start your engine, orcome on when you are driving. OIL This indicates thatoil is not going through your engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could be low onoil or could have some other oil problem. Have it fixed right away. The oil light could also come on in two other situations: 0 When the ignition is on but theengine is not running, the light will come on asa test to show youit is working, butthe light will go out when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or bulb. Haveit fixed right away. 2-57 - Low Oil Level Light 1CAU 1 . K “ L - Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire.You or others could be burned. Check your oilas soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. LOW OIL Your engine is equipped with anoil level monitoring system. When the ignition key is turned on, theLOW OIL light will briefly flash. If the light does not flash, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. I NOTICE: Damage to your engine from neglected oil by problems can be costly and is not covered your warranty. I 2-58 If the light stays on,stop the vehicleon a level surface and turn the engineoff. Check theoil level using the engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine Oil” in the Index.) If the light does not flash, have the low oil level sensor system repairedso it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level during the brief period between key on and engine crank. It does not monitor the engine oil level when the engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check is only performedif the engine has been turned off for a considerable periodof time, allowing theoil normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan. Change Oil Soon Light CHG OIL SOON The CHANGE OIL SOON light should come on as a bulb check when you start the engine. If this light stays on for about 20 seconds after you turn on theignition, have the oil changed. When to change your oil also depends on driving habits and conditionsbecause they directly affectengine speed, coolant temperature and vehicle speed.Because of this, the CHANGE OIL SOON light maycome on as early as 2,000 miles (3,200 km) or less for harsh conditions. Remember, afterchanging your engine oil, the system must be reset; with the ignition keyin the RUN position, but the engine off, fully push and release the accelerator pedal three times withinfive seconds. If the CHANGE OIL SOON lightflashes two times, the system is reset. However if the light comes on and stays onfor five seconds, it did notreset. You’ll need toreset the system again. Security Light SECURITY This light willcome on when you turn the key to START and stay on until the vehicle starts. It willalso come on and stay on if your key is too dirtyor wet for the PASS-Key I1 system to read the resistor pellet. If the resistor pelletis damaged or missing, the light will flash. If you’re driving and the lightcomes on andremains on, your PASS-Key I1 system is not working properly.Your vehicle is not protectedby PASS-Key 11, and you should see your dealer. 2-59 Fuel Gage Your fuel gage tells you about how muchfuel you have left when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears EMPTY (E), you still have a littlefuel left, but you should get moresoon. 2-60 Here are some things owners ask about. All these situations are normaland do not show a problem with your fuel gage: 0 At the service station, the pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL (F). 0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually tooka little more or less than half thetank's capacity tofill it. 0 The gage movesa little when you turn a corner or speed up. b NOTES 2-61 b 2-62 NOTES 0Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section,you'll find out how to operatethe comfort control andaudio systems offered with your Chevrolet. Be sure to readabout the particular systems supplied with your vehicle. 3-2 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 Comfort Controls Air Conditioning Heating Ventilation System Ventilation Tips Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger Audio Systems Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic Tone Control Setting the Clock for Systems without Automatic Tone Control 3-6 3-8 3- 12 ' 3-15 3-17 3-18 3-18 3- 19 3-20 3-20 AM-FM Stereo AM-F" Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped) AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player and Automatic ToneControl (If Equipped) Theft-Deterrent Feature Audio SteeringWheel Controls (If Equipped) Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your AudioSystem Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Fixed Mast Antenna 3-1 Comfort Controls Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls With these systems,you can control the heating, cooling and ventilationin your vehicle.The systems work best if you keep your windows closed while using them. Fan Knob The right knob with thefan symbol selects the forceof air you want. To turn the fan off, turn the knob to “0”. Temperature Control If your system does not have the auxiliary temperature control option, the center knob changes the temperature of the aircoming through the system. Turn this knob toward red (clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue (counterclockwise)for cooler air. If your system doeshave the auxiliary temperature control option, the center levers change the temperature of the air coming through the system. The DRIV lever sets the temperaturefor the driver and rear seat passengers, and thePASS lever sets the temperature for the front seat passenger. For maximum defroster performance, setthe DRIV and PASS levers at full warm. 3-2 Mode Knob *e f l VENT This setting brings in outsideair and The left knobhas several settings to control the direction directs it throughthe instrument panel outlets. of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a 0 FLOOR: This setting sends mostof the air comfortable setting. through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes outof MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside the defrost and side window vents. your vehicle and sendsit through the instrument w e panel outlets.The air conditioning compressor will run DEFOG: This setting allows half ofthe air to go automatically in this setting unless the outside to the floor ducts and halfto the defrost and side temperature is below 40°F (4°C).(Even when the compressor is running, you can control the temperature.) window vents. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside A/C: This setting brings in outside air and directs it temperature is below 40°F (4°C).(Even when the through the instrument panel outlets. The air compressor is running, youcan control the temperature.) conditioning compressor will run automatically in this DEFROST This setting directs mostof the air setting unlessthe outside temperature is below through the defrost and side window vents. Some of the 40°F (4°C). (Even when the compressor is air goes to thefloor ducts. The air conditioning running, youcan control the temperature.) compressor will run automaticallyin this setting unless +e the outside temperatureis below 40°F (4°C).(Even +fl BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in the outsideair when the compressor is running, you can control and directs it two ways. Halfof the air is directed the temperature.) through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the remaining air is directed throughthe floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting unless theoutside temperature is below 40°F (4°C). (Even whenthe compressor is running, you can control the temperature.) +’ +fl 9 3-3 Air Conditioning Heating On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let On cold days useFLOOR with the temperature control hot, inside air escape. This reduces the A/C compressor all theway in the red area.The system will bring in load, which should help fuel economy. outside air, heatit and send it to the floor ducts. For quick cool-down on veryhot days, useMAX with the temperature control allthe way in the blue area.If this setting is usedfor long periodsof time, the air in your vehiclemay become toodry. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C with the temperature control in the blue area. The system will bring in outside air and cool it. If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, youcan use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it's cold outside(0°F (-18°C) or lower).An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat. See "Engine Coolant Heater" in the Index. Ventilation System On cool but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper body, but your lower body may notbe wann enough. You can use BI-LEVEL with the temperature control in the middle. The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body, while sending slightly warmedair to your lower body. You may noticethis temperature difference more at some times than at others. Adjust the directionof aifflow by moving the louvered vents. 3-4 Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside airinto the vehicle whenit is moving. Outside air will also enterthe vehicle whenthe air conditioning fan is running. Ventilation Tips 0 For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. 0 Keep the hood and front air inletfree of ice, snow or any other obstruction,such as leaves. The heater and defroster will workfar better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 When you entera vehicle in cold weather, setthe mode toFLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. 0 Keep the air path underthe front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle. Defogging and Defrosting Your system has two settings for clearing thefront and side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use DEFROST with thetemperature knob(s) all the way in the red area.To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, use DEFOG. Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. Press the button to It will turn itselfoff after about ten minutes. If you turn it on again, thedefogger will only runfor about five minutes before turningoff. You can also turn it off by turning off the ignition or pressing the button again. Do not attachanything like a temporary vehicle license or decal across thedefogger grid. 3-5 I NOTICE: AM-FM Stereo Don’t usea razor blade or something else sharp on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Audio S stems Q7 Your Delco audio system has been designed to operate years of listening pleasure.You will get the easily and give most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do and how to Playing the Radio operate all its controls, be sure to you’re getting the most out VOLUME: This knob turnsthe system on and off and of the advanced engineering that went into it. controls the volume.To increase volume and turn the Setting the Clock for Systems with radio on, turn the knob clockwise.Turn it Automatic Tone Control counterclockwiseto decrease volume. Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by and hold MN until the correct minute appears. pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, Setting the Clock for Systems without press this button to recall the station frequency. Automatic Tone Control Press SET. SET will appear on the display forfive seconds. Withinfive seconds, press and hold the right arrow on the SEEK button until the correct minute appears. Press and hold the left arrow on the SEEK button until the correct hour appears. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press the lowerknob to switch betweenAM and FM. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows, then press the other SEEK arrow;SCAN will appear on the display. UseSCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station,stop for a few seconds, thengo on to the next station. The radio will scan up or downthe radio band, depending on the arrow you pressedfirst. Press both SEEK arrows or the upper knob to stop scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.) 5. Press and hold one of the four numbered buttons, within five seconds. The sound willmute. When it returns, release the button.Whenever you press that numbered button,the station youset will return. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Press SET. (SET willappear on the display.) 3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time, within five seconds. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the buttons. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station you set will return. 4. Repeat the steps foreach pair of pushbuttons. Setting the Tone BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increaseor decrease bass. TREB: Slide the leverup or down to increase or decrease treble. If a stationis weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Turn the control behind the upperknob to move the sound tothe left or right speakers.The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Turn the control behind thelower knob to move the sound to thefront or rear speakers.The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. In addition tothe four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons atthe same time. Just: 3-7 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped) Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press thisknob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn theknob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwiseto decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. RECALL: Display thetime with the ignitionoff by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall station frequency. SCV: Your system has a feature called Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV, your 3-8 audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volumeat the desired level.Move the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust theSCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don't want to useSCV, turn the control all the way down. Each detent onthe control ring allowsfor more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl and FM2. The display shows your selection. TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push theknob back into its stored position when you're not using it. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press and holdone of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to each station for a few seconds. The radio willgo to a station,stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. PressSEEK again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning. I PUSHBUTTONS: The six numberedpushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, sixFM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radioon. will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through both FM 1 and FM2 preset stations andFM1 or FM2 will appear on the display. 2. Press AM-FM to selectthe band. Setting theTone 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected. 5 . Press andhold one of the six numbered buttons.The sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selectedfor that button. 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored onyour pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio will scanthrough each of the stations stored on your pushbuttons,except those stations with weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting storedfor that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is inthe P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1-P6) BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass andcounterclockwise to decrease bass. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE setting will switch tomanual and the AUTO TONE display willgo blank. TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase trebleand counterclockwise to decrease treble. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a stationis weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE:This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical, news,rock, pop, country/western and jazz stations. C/W willappear on the display whenyou first press AUTO TONE.Each time you press it, another setting willappear on the display. Pressit again after JAZZ appears and the AUTOTONE display willgo 3-10 NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the SEEK rightarrow to search for the next selection onthe tape. If you hold the button or press it more than once,the player will continue moving forward through the tape.Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work.The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation. The sound will muteduring NEXT or SEEK operation. Press thisbutton or one of the SEEK arrows again to return tonormal play. REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly. Press it again to return toplaying speed. The radio will play the last-selected stationwhile the tape reverses. 00 (5): Press this button toreduce background noise. Note thatthe double-D symbol will appear on the display. Dolby@Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation. FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Pressthe button again to return to playing speed.The radio will play the last-selected station whilethe tape advances. AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player. TAPE AUX:Press this button tochange to the tape function whenthe radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow willappear on the display whenthe tape is active. If your system is equipped with a remote playback device, pressingthis button a second time will allow the remote device to play. EJECT Press this button toremove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated witheither the ignition or radiooff. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio offif this buttonis pressed first. If you leave a cassette tapein the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm. CLN: If this messageappears on the display,the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as soonas possible to prevent damage tothe tapes and player.See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset. 3-11 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control(If Equipped) and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same you to as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each detent on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at a faster rate of speed. Finding a Station AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2.The display shows your selection. Playing the Radio PWR-VOL: Press thisknob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume,turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwiseto decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously. RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being played. If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds. SCV: Your system has a feature called Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road 3-12 TUNE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnit to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it. SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds, and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to a station, stopfor a few seconds, thengo on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numberedpushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, sixFM1 and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn theradio on. 2. Press AM-FM to select the band. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the typeof station selected. 5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.The sound will mute.When it returns, release the button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set willreturn and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selectedfor that button. 6. Repeat the steps foreach pushbutton. P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. PSCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the PSCAN mode. The channel number (Pl-P6) will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed. Setting theTone BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turnthe knob clockwise to increase bass andcounterclockwise to decrease bass. Whenyou use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE setting willswitch to manual and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. TREB: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase trebleand counterclockwise to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s AUTO TONE setting willswitch to manual and the AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a stationis weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. AUTO TONE: This feature allows you tochoose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for classical, news, rock,pop, country/western and jazz stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another setting willappear on the display. Pressit again after JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, ifyou use the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. 3-13 Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) PREV (1): Press this button or the leftSEEK arrow to the start of a current track.If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. The soundwill mute while seeking. FADE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers RDM (2): Press this button to hearthe tracks in random, and counterclockwisefor the rear speakers.The middle rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show on position balances the sound between the speakers. the display. Press RDMagain to turnoff random play. RDM is reset tooff when the disc is ejected. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to goto the next track.If you holdthe button Playing aCompact Disc or pressit more than once,the player will continue Insert a disc partwayinto the slot, label side up. The moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute player will pullit in. The disc should begin playing. The while seeking. display will showCD and the CD symbol. REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse If you’re driving on a veryrough road or if it’s very hot, within a track. Releaseit to play the passage. You can ERR (error) may appearon the disc may not play and use the counter reading on the display to locate a the display. PressRECALL to takeERR off the display. passage more easily. When things get back to normal, the disc should play. If FWD (6): Press andhold this button to advance the disc comes out,it could be that: quickly within a track. Release it to resume playing.You The disc is upside down. can use the counter reading on the display to locate a passage easily. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. 3-14 RECALL: Press this button tosee which track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing (elapsed time).The track number also appears when you change the volume or when a new track starts to play. AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio whena disc is in the player.The letters CD will go off the display. CD AUX: Press this button tochange to the disc function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on the display whenthe disc is in the player, whether it is active or not. EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio will play. The disc will start at thefirst track when you reinsert it. If you turn off the ignitionor radio with a disc in the player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the ignition or system,the disc will start playing where it was stopped.If you press EJECT but don't remove the disc, the player willpull the disc back in to protect it after about one minute. If you leave a compact disc in the playerwhile listening to the radio,it may become warm. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It worksby using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power removed. is The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen. When THEFTLOCK is activated,the radio will display LOC to indicatea locked conditionanytime battery power is removed.If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio withthe secret code before it will operate. Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The instructions whichfollow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended thatyou read through all nine steps before starting the procedure. NOTE: If you allow morethan 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4. 3-15 1. Write down any three or four-digit number from 000 to 1999 and keepit in a safe place separate from the vehicle. Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss 2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: 3. Turn the radio off. 1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number whichyou have written down. 2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code. 7. Press HR to make the firstone or two digits agree with your code. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down. The display will showREP to letyou know that you need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your secret code. 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show SEC to letyou know that your radiois secure. The indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turnedoff. 3-16 3. Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree with your code. 4. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree with your code. 5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secretcode you have written down. The display will showSEC, indicating the radiois now operable and secure. If you enter the wrongcode eight times,INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have threechances to enterthe correct code before INOP appears. If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer. Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps: To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Power Loss”earlier in this section. 2. Turn the radio off. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped) 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display. If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel. 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 5. Press MN again to make the last twodigits agree with your code. 6. Press HR to make thefirst one or two digits agree with your code. 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secretcode you have written down. The display will show---,indicating that the radiois no longer secured. If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered. When battery poweris removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display. G PRESET SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station. AM FM If a cassette tape orcompact disc is playing, the player will advance with theup arrow and rewind with the down arrow. PRESET Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons. 3-17 AM-FM: Press this button tochoose AM,FMl or FM 2. If a cassette tapeor compact disc is playing,it will stop and the radio will play. I VOLUME: Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume. Understanding Radio Reception FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles (16to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere withFM signals, causing the sound tocome and go. AM rne range for mostAM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night.The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things likestorms and power lines.Try reducing the trebleto reduce this noiseif you ever get it. PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radiois playing. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again toturn on the sound. 3-18 I Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until itis too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it. To help avoid hearing loss or damage: 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. 0 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. I NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like atape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may inteflere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, Delco radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’ssystems may interfere with the operationof sound equipmentthat has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobileradio and telephone units. -- -- Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes aordamaged mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly ormay cause failure of the tape player. Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. Your radio may displayCLN to indicate that you have used your tape playerfor 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette tosee if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassettehas no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. Cleaning may be done witha scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. is normalfor the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your Chevrolet dealership. You may also choosea non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which usesa cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject and,it may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Care of Your Compact Discs ItHandle discs carefidly. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for without being damaged. If the mast should ever become five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will slightly bent,you can straighten it out by hand. If the display --- to show the indicator was reset. mast is badly bent, asit might beby vandals, you should replace it. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette Check every once in a while to be sure the maststill is tape is in good condition before you have your tape tightened to the fender. player serviced. 3-20 0Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included manyother useful tips ondriving. 4-2 4-3 4-6 4-6 4- 10 4- 12 4-13 4-14 4-15 Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off-Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Driving at Night 4-17 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-23 4-25 4-29 4-3 1 Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving ona Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer Defensive Driving The best advice anyonecan give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your Chevrolet: Buckleup. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other driversare going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be readyfor their mistakes. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 4-2 Death and injury associated withdrinEclng and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if peopledo? How muchis “too much” ifthe driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although itdepends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinlung depends upon four things: Drunken Driving Judgment The amount of alcohol consumed Muscular Coordination The drinker’s body weight Vision The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking Attentiveness. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years,some 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult population-- choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s againstthe law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychologicaland developmental reasons for these laws. 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. According tothe American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three12-ounce (355 ml) bottlesof beer in an hour will endup with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka. 4-3 Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states setsthe legal limitat a BAC of 0.10 percent.In a growing numberof U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (inone hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,it depends on how much alcoholis in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. 1 But the abilityto drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many peopleare impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharplyfor drivers whohave a BAC of BAC would be close to0.12 percent. A person who of consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chanceof having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a a lower relative percentage of body water than men. level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater! 4-4 The body takesabout an hour to rid itselfof the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up.“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer.What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when child a darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Drinking and then drlving is very dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. You can havea serious or even fatal collision ifyou drive after drinking. Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designatea driver who will not drink. -- -- 4-5 Control of a Vehicle Brakir You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time. a - First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot anddo it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average.It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance inan emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the conditionof the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask moreof those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may nothave time to cool between hard stops.Your brakes will wearout much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life. Anti-Lock Brakes (Option) Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal mayget harder to pushdown. If your engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assistis used up, it may take longerto stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. If your vehiclehas anti-lock brakes, the brake pedal will say so. 4-7 And this warning lighton the instrument panel will come on briefly when you start your vehicle. ANTI LOCK When you start your engine,or when you beginto drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal movesa little. This is normal. If there’s a problem withthe anti-lock brake system, the anti-lock brake system warning light will stay on or flash. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light’’ in the Index. Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet. You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS. A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down.If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at the rear wheels. 4-8 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster Remember: Anti-lock doesn’tchange the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease than any driver could. The computer is programmed to stopping distance.If you get too close to the vehicle in make the most of available tire and road conditions. front of you, you won’thave time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though youhave anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel the system working, or you may notice some noise, but thisis normal. LOW TRAC When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid, this light willcome on. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Active Light” in the Index. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, yourcomputer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed andcontrols braking pressure accordingly. 4-9 Braking in Emergencies Steering At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situatian that requires hard btaking. Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the systemis not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same lawsof physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle goingin the same direction.If you’ve ever on wet ice, you’ll understand this. tried to steer a vehicle The traction you can getin a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. 4-10 Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control systems -- steering and braking-- have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. The same thing can happen if you’re steering through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate.Those two control systems -- steering and acceleration -- can overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road and make you lose control. What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal,steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts outfrom between parked carsand stops right in frontof you. You can avoid these problemsby braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s thetime for evasive action -- steering around the problem. Your Chevrolet can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applyyour brakes -- but, unless you have anti-lock’ notenough to lock your wheels. (See “Braking in Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. If you need toreduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enterthe curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust yourspeed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until youare out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-11 Off-Road Recovery You may find sometime thatyour right wheelshave dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended9 and 3 o’clock positions,you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. Butyou have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straightenthe wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact thatsuch emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-12 If the levelof the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery shouldbe fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if there is nothing the in way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing 0 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially ifyou’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’thave adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenlyslows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as thetime comes to move into the other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you wouldlose by dropping back.And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. The driver of a vehicleabout to passanother on a two-lane highway waitsfor just the rightmoment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily!Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, sincethe passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration anger or can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: 0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. Watch for trai5c signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a signup ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But takecare that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder andcheck the blind spot. 4-13 0 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle tosee its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem tobe farther awayfrom you than it really is.) In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seekan escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skidsare always possible. The three typesof skids correspond to your Chevrolet’s three control systems.In the braking skid, your wheels on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too next vehicle. much speed or steering incurve a causes tires to slip and 0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causesthe driving wheels to spin. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your footoff the accelerator pedal. a If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the can ease a little to the right. accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle togo. If you start steering quicklyenough, your Loss of Control vehicle may straighten out. Alwaysbe ready for a Let’s review what driving experts say about what second skidif it occurs. happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. a Try not to pass morethan one vehicle at a time 4-14 Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material ison the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow downon slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. Driving at Night ._ ........... ......................... .- .......... .......... _ .....”. ..-I--. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a“mirrored surface” -- and slow down when youhave any doubt. If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have anti-lock, then in abraking skid (where the wheels are no longer rolling), releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-15 Here are some tips on night driving. 0 Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. 0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. 0 Slow down, especiallyon higher speed roads.Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watchfor animals. 0 If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place and rest. Night Vision No one can see as wellat night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may requireat least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytimecan also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will if you’re have less trouble adjusting to night. But driving, don’t wear sunglassesat night. They may cut 4-16 down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can takea second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare(as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at nightis made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light far up less of a roadway when youare in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; thatway, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Justas your headlamps shouldbe checked regularly for proper aim,so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t even aware of it. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roadscan mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good ason dry roads. And, if your tires don’thave much tread left, you’llget even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower andbe cautious if rain starts to fall while youare driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper bladesare in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signsand traffic signals, pavement markings, theedge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape andkeep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when stripsof rubber startto separate from the inserts. 4-17 I A CAUTION: I Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won't work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side.You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving througha large puddleof water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can't, try to slow down before you hit them. 4-18 I Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. NOTICE: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle.If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much treador if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there couldbe hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds.There just isn’t a hard andfast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down whenit israining. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your parking lamps-- to help make you more visible to others. 0 Besides slowing down, allowsome extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted by road spray. 0 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) 4-19 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the cityjust as you would for a cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”) Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersectionor may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streetsis the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other driversare doing and pay attentionto traffic signals. 4-20 Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear viewof the freeway as you drive aiong-the entranceramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch onyour turn signal, check your mirrors andglance over your shoulderas often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it's slower.Stay in the rightlane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes,check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal. Just before you leave the lane,glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn't another vehicle in your "blind" spot. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow -a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slowerat night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well inadvance. If you miss your exit,do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic andkeep to the right.Drive at the same speed mostof the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit rampcan be curved, sometimes quite sharply. left lane on afreeway as a passing lane. 4-21 The.exit speed is usually posted. e a 0 e * e 0 4-22 Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the humthe of tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen toyou! If it does, your vehiclecan leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: 0 Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior. 0 Keep youreyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Checkyour rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently. 0 If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving inflat or rolling terrain. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. 0 Keep your vehicle ingood shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle.These parts can work hard on mountain roads. 0 Know how to go down hills. The most important thing toknow is this: let yourengine do some of the slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep orlong hill. h you don’t shift down, your brakescould get so hot thatthey wouldn’t workwell. You would then have poor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Shift down let to your engineassist your brakeson a steep downhill slope. 4-24 Coasting downhillin NEUTRAL (N)or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could getso hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor brakingor even none going downa hill. You could crash. Always haveyour engine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill. 0 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. 0 Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. 0 As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. 0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving 1 Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your vehicle in goodshape for winter. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk. Include an ice scraper, a small brushor broom, a supply of windshield washerfluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. 4-25 Driving onSnow or Ice What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Verycold snow or ice canbe slick and hard to driveon. But wet Most of the time, those places where your tires meet theice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the road probably have good traction. least tractionof all. You can get wetice when it’s about However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews the road,you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll can get there. have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow-- drive with caution. Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock, ’ see “Anti-Lock” in the Index. This system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.) Whetheryou have the anti-lock braking system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the most traction you can. 4-26 Remember, unless youhave anti-lock, if you brake so hard that your wheelsstop rolling, you’lljust slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and youcan still steer. 0 Whatever your braking system, allow greater following distance on any slippery road. 0 Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear.If you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not tobrake while you’re actually on the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers. If You’re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a serious situation.You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things todo to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: 0 Turn on your hazard flashers. 4-27 1 I Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stoppedby the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything youcan wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing keep to warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, butbe careful. 4-28 ,A C AJTTON: Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill you. You can’t seeit or smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time tosure be snow doesn’t collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must.This saves fuel. When you runthe engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will needa well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with yourheadlamps. Let the heater runfor awhile. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. Loading Your Vehicle TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP. WT. CTR. FRT. RR. TOTAL LBS. KG , \ MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE PSIIKPa RTG FRT. RR. SPA. IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.The Tire-Loading Information label is inside the trunk lid. The label tells youthe proper size, speed rating andrecommended inflation pressuresfor the tires on your vehicle.It also gives youimportant information about the numberof people that can be in your vehicleand the total weight youcan carry. This includes the weightof all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. 4-29 MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, A N D THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. i The other label isthe Certification label, found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.It tells you the gross weight capacityof your vehicle, called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicleor the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)for either the front or rear axle. If you do have a heavy load,spread it out. Don’t carry more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk. 4-30 Do not load your vehicle any heavrer than the GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or itcan changethe way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle. NOTICE: Your warranty does not coverparts or components that fail because of overloading. If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages or anythingelse -- they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going. Towing a Trailer Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. 0 Put things inthe trunk of your vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward as you can. Try to spread the weight evenly. 0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. 0 Don’t leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle. 0 When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it whenever you can. If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your Chevrolet dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. -- NOTICE: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not coveredby your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your Chevrolet dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. 4-31 Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with proper towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But traileringis different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the dragof the added weight.The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generatingextra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. 4-32 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here are some important points: 0 There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig willbe legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police. 0 Consider using a sway control.You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. 0 Don’t tow a trailerat all during thefirst 1,000 miles (1 600 km)your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged. 0 Then, during thefirst 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 kmh) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear at the in heavier loads. 0 Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 kmh)) to save wearon your vehicle’s parts. Three important considerations have to do with weight: 0 the weight of the trailer, the weight of the trailer tongue and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires. Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safelybe? It shouldnever weigh more than 1,000 pounds(450 kg). But even that can be too heavy. It depends on how you plan to useyour rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull a trailer areall important. And,it can also depend on any special equipment that youhave on your vehicle. ‘You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at: Chevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A)of any trailer is animportant weight to measurebecause it affects the total capacity weight of your vehicle.The capacity weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who willbe riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must subtract the tongue load from your vehicle’s capacity weight because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too.See “Loading Your Vehicle” in theIndex for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-33 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tiresare inflated to the upper limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the Tire-Loading Information label (found inside the trunk lid) or see “Loading Your Vehicle”in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weightof the trailer tongue. B Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: The bumpers on your vehicleare not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitchesor other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight(B). If you have a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you maybe able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. 4-34 0 Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too. \ ! I ! Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Followthe manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground. Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not be used with your vehicle. If everything checks out this far, thenmake the brake fluid tapat the upper rear master cylinder port. But don’t usecopper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and break off.Use steel brake tubing. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of Trailer Brakes handling and braking with the added weightof the Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read and trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a gooddeal longer and not nearlyas follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be responsive as your vehicleis by itself. able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do nottry to tap (and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, into your vehicle’sbrake system. If you do, both lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.If the trailer has brake systems won’t work well,or at all. electric brakes,start your vehicleand trailer moving and Even if your vehicle doesn’thave anti-lock brakes, then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the brakes are working. This lets you check your the trailer’s brake system will use more than electrical connection at thesame time. 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s During yourtrip, check occasionally to be sure that the master cylinder. If it does, both braking systems load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes. are still working. Following Distance Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can helpyou avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towinga trailer. And, because you’rea good deal longer, you’ll need togo much farther beyond the passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane. Backing Up Hold the bottomof the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to left, the justmove that hand to the left.To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. 4-36 Making Turns NOTICE: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal.Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Parking on Hills When you towa trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with yourChevrolet dealer. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will alsoflash, telling other driversyou’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. something If goes wrong, your rig could start to move.People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flashfor turns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working. 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to lower a gear before you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, you mighthave to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until thechocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes.Then apply your parking brake, and then shift toPARK (P). 5. Release the regular brakes. On a long uphill grade,shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. If you are towing a trailer, you may prefer to drive in DRIVE (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@) (or, as you need to, alower gear). 4-37 When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a will 1. 2. 3. 4. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehiclewill need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more Apply your regular brakesand hold the pedal down on this. Things that are especially .importantin trailer while you: operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), Start your engine; engine oil, belt, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is coveredin this manual, and the Index 0 Shift into a gear; and will helpyou find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s 0 Release the:parking brake. a good idea to review these sections before you start Let up an the brake pedal. your trip. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodicallyto see that all hitch nuts and bolts Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. are tight. 0Section I Problems on the Road Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occuron the road. 5-2 5-3 5-8 5-13 5-15 Hazard Warning Flashers Jump Starting Towing Your Vehicle Engine Overheating Cooling System 5-24 5-24 5-35 5-36 IfaTire Goes Flat Changing Flat a Tire Compact Spare Tire IfYou’reStuck:InSand,Mud, Ice or Snow 5-1 Press the switch (located near the ignition switch) to flash on and --. make your front and rear turn signal lamps off. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your keyis in, and even if the key isn’t in. To turn off the flashers, pressthe switch again. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work. Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. 5-2 - Other WarningDevices If you carry reflective triangles, youcan set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. Jump Starting If your battery hasrun down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables start to your Chevrolet. But please follow the steps below to do it safely. ~ ~- NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehiclethat wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty. Trying to start your Chevroletby pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage yourvehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: They contain acid that can burn you. They contain gas that can explode or ignite. 0 They contain enough electricityto burn you. If you don’t follow these steps exactly, someor all of these thingscan hurt you. NOTICE: If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles aren’ttouching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t beable to start your Chevrolet,and the badgrounding could damage the electrical systems. 5-3 To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put your automatic transaxle in PARK (P). 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lamps that aren’t neededas well as radios. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries.And it could save your radio! NOTICE: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. (Your vehicle’s battery is located under the windshield washer fluid reservoir.) I A J: I 5 . Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.Your Chevrolet has a remote positive (+)jump starting terminal.The terminal is on the same side of the engine compartment as your battery.You should always use the remote positive (+) terminal insteadof the positive(+) terminal on your battery. To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, lift the red plastic cap. 2 . C c An electric fan can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. 5-4 6. Check that thejumper cables don’t haveloose or missing insulation.If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too. Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water.You don’t need to add water to the Delco Freedom@battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But ifa battery has filler caps,be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and get medical help immediately. Before you connect the cables, here aresome basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a metalengine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-), or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. A CAUTION: Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engines are running. ~ 5-5 8. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive(+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle hasone. ... . . .....,.. 7. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. I Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative (-) terminal. Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step.The other end of the negativecable doesn ’Igo to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted, metal part on the engine of the vehicle withthe dead battery. 5-6 13. Remove the cables in reverse order toprevent electrical shorting. Takecare that they don’ttouch each other or any other metal. - B + 0 @ 10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back tothe battery is much less. and run 11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery the engine for a while. - A C + A. Heavy Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery 12. Try to start the vehicle with thedead battery. If it won’t start after afew tries, it probably needs service. 5-7 Towing Your Vehicle Try to have a Chevrolet dealer aorprofessional towing service tow your vehicle. If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog lamps, aero skirting,or special tires and wheels, these instructions and illustrations may not be correct. f Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or rear with sling-type equipment. That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. The make, model and year of your vehicle. Whether you can still move the shift lever. If there was an accident, what was damaged. When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator know that this manual contains detailed towing instructions and illustrations.The operator may want to see them. 5-8 To help avoidinjury toyou or others: 0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. 0 Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. 0 Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. 0 Never get under yourvehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck. 0 Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chainswhen towing it. Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead. A vehicle can fall froma car carrier if it isn’t adequately secured. This can cause a collision, serious personal injury and vehicle damage.The vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or steel cables beforeit is transported. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components. When your vehicle is beingtowed, have the ignition turned to theOFF position. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, withclamping a device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lockfor this. The transaxle should be inNEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels, unless you must.If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance restrictions later in this section or your transaxle will be damaged. If these limitations mustbe exceeded, then the drive wheelshave to be supported on a dolly. 5-9 Front Towing NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or fascidfog lamp damage will occur. Usewheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for car-carrier securing. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage avehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, raise the vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained between the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment. Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to suspension components when using car-carrier equipment. Always use T-hooksinserted in the T-hook slots. 5-10 Attach T-hook chains in front of the wheels, into the side slotsof the cradle, on both sides. Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 k h ) , 50 miles (80 km) A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels when towing from the rear: These slots are to be used when loading or securing to car-carrier equipment. Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each lower control arm. 5-13 i NOTICE: Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear bumper valance will be damaged.Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for car-carrier securing. Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur fromvehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage, install a towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment. Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to suspension components when using car-carrier equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. I 5-12 Attach T-hook chains into the slots in the bottom of the floor pan support rails, just ahead of the rear wheels, on both sides. These slots are to be used when loading and securing to car-carrier equipment. Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of both lateral arms. Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning light about a hot engine on yourinstrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and“Engine Coolant Temperature WarningLight” in the Index. You also have a LOW COOLANT light on your instrument panel. See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index. If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine GAL JON: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open thehood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats, andget out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 5-13 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you: Climb a long hill ona hot day. 0 Stop after high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minuteor so: 1. Turn off your air conditioner. 2. Turn on your heater tofull hot at the highestfan speed and openthe window as necessary. 3. If you’re in a trafficjam, shift to NEUTRAL(N); otherwise, shift tothe highest gear while driving which is AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(0). 5-14 If you nolonger have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’tcome back on, youcan drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for two or three minutes whileyou’re parked, to see if the warning stops.But then, if you still havethe warning, turn o f t h e engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. Cooling System When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what you'll see: 3.4L DOHC (Code X) Engine A. Coolant Recovery Tank 3100 (Code M) Engine B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Electric Engine Fans A. Coolant Recovery Tank B. Radiator Pressure Cap C. Electric Engine Fans 5-15 'TILJ: J An electric fan under the hood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. I r., 3, If the coolantinside the coolant recovery tankis boiling, don't do anything else until it cools down. The coolant level should be at orabove theCOLD mark on a cold engine. The coolant level should be at or above the HOT mark on a hot engine. If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. 5-16 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at theCOLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) andDEX-COOL@ (silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.) Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine parts, canbe very hot.Don’t touch them. Ifyou do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant.That could cause an engine fire, andyou could be burned. Get any leakfixed beforeyou drive thevehicle. I NOTICE: I Engine damage from running your engine without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty. If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if the electric engine fans are running.If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. Adding only plain water to yourcooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain wateror the wrongmix, your engine could get toohot butyou wouldn’t getthe overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. 5-17 I NOTICE: In cold weather, water canfreeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mix. You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and itwill burn if the engineparts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine. When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the COLD mark, start your vehicle. If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try.You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is cool beforeyou do it. 5-18 'A I CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand radiator pressure cap to cool if youever haveto turn the pressure cap. -- -- 5-19 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator NOTICE: ~~ 2. Then keep turning the pressurecap, but now pushdown as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. Your engine hasa specific radiator fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould causeyour engine to overheat and be severely damaged. 1. You can remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseuntil it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-20 You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolanton a hotengine. 3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed valve. 3100 V6 (VIN Code M): There are two bleed valves. One is locatedon the thermostat housing.The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube. 3.4L DOHC V6 (VINCode X): There are two bleed valves. They are located on the thermostat housing and heater outlet pipe. 5-21 4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. If you see a stream of coolant comingfrom an air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the valves after the radiator is filled. 5. Rinse or wipeany spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment. 5-22 6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD mark. 7. Put the cap backon the coolant recovery tank, but off. leave the radiator pressure cap 10. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.Be sure thearrows on the pressure cap line up like this. 8. Start the engine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiatorhose getting hot. Watch outfor the engine fans. 11. Check the coolantin the recovery tank.The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT mark when theengine is hot or at theCOLD mark when the engine is cold. 9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower,add more of the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck. 5-23 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire It’s unusualfor a tire to“blc>w Out’’while you’re driving, If a tire goes flat, avoidfurther tire and wheel damage especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes’by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on your hazard out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. warning flashers. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A CAUTION: Changing a tire can causean injury. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badly injured. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a Find a level placeto change your tire. To help prevent thevehicle from moving: skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a foot from the skid. In any rear blowout, remove your 1. Set the parking brake firmly. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by 2. Put the shift leverin PARK (P). steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be 3. Turn off the engine. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently To be even morecertain the vehicle won’t move, brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible. you can put blocks at the front and rear of the If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your tire farthest away from the one being changed. jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. That would bethe tire on theother side of the vehicle, at the opposite end. 5-24 ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ t-..... .... Removing the Spare Tire andTools .......... .......... ..... ..... ..... ..... c The following steps willtell you how to use the jack and change a tire. 1 The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull the carpeting from thefloor of the trunk. Turn the center nut on the compact spare cover counterclockwiseto remove it. Then lift and remove the cover. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it. Then lift off the spacer and remove the spare tire. See “Compact Spare Tire’’ later in this section for more information about the compact spare. 5-25 Turn the nut holding the jack and wrench counterclockwiseand removeit. Then remove thejack and wrench. 5-26 If there is a wheel cover,loosen the nutcaps with the wheel wrench. They won’tcome off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off. Be careful; theedge may be sharp. Don’ttry to remove the cover with your bare hands. To remove a centercap, use the wrench to.pry gently at the notch. Don’tuse a tool thatis narrower than the wrench to pry at this notch. If your vehiclehas wheel nut caps, remove them using the wheel wrench. 5-27 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 3. Position thejack under the vehicle and raise the jack lift head until itfits firmly into the notchin the vehicles frame nearest the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you. I . . . -.., ,.. 1. Using the wheel wrench, loosenall the wheel nuts. Don't remove them yet. 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head a few inches. 5-28 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicleslips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by jack. a A CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 4. Raise the vehicleby turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the spare tire tofit under the vehicle. 5. Remove all wheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire. 5-29 6. Remove anyrust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. A CAUTION: - Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become looseafter a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, removeany rust or dirtfrom the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,to get all the rust or dirt off. 'A CAUTION: Never use oilor grease onstuds or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causinga serious accident. 5-30 7. Replace the wheel nuts with therounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. 8. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-31 9. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown. I NOTICE: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. 10. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flattire repaired or replaced. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead toan accident. Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure get to new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can andhave the nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft (140 Nom). 5-32 I NOTICE: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.If you try to puta wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. Storing the Flat Tire and Tools Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. L After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you’ll need to storethe flat tirein your trunk. Usethe following procedure to securethe flat tire in the trunk. Put the flat tire in the trunkso the side that faces out when it is on the vehicle is facing down. The full-size tire will notfit down into the well.Place it so the frontis in the well and the rear is out of the well. Put the bolt throughone of the wheelnut holes, install the retainer over the bolt, then install the wing nut. Put the spacer and nut next to the tire in the well. Store the cover as far forward as possible. The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact Spare” in the Index.See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly. When you install the wheelcover on the full-size tire, tighten the nut caps to 5 lb-ft (7 N-m). 5-33 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools I 1. Nut 2. Cover 3. Wing Nut A CAUTION: 4. Spacer Storing a jack, a tire or other equipmentin the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause In a sudden stop or colIision, loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place. 5 . Compact SpareTire 6. Wrench injury. 7. Nut 5 8. Retainer 9. Jack 10. Bolt 5-34 Compact Spare Tire Although thecompact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape inyou case need it again. NOTICE: When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails.The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. Don’t useyour compact spare on other vehicles. And don’t mix yourcompact spare tire or wheel with other wheelsor tires. They won’tfit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. NOTICE: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damageyour vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare. 5-35 I NOTICE: If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don’t want do to when your vehicleis stuck is to spin your wheels too fast.The method knownas “rocking” can help youget out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution. Spinning yourwheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as thetires. If you spin thewheels too fastwhile shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. I If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxleor other partsof the vehicle can overheat. Thatcould cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin thewheels as little aspossible. Don’t spin thewheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. 5-36 I For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as littleas possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t getyou out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out. see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. NOTES 5-37 NOTES 0 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will findinformation about the care of your Chevrolet.This section beginswith service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricantlevels. There is also technicalinformation about your vehicle, and a partdevoted to its appearance care. 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-7 6-11 6- 17 6-18 6-22 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-3 1 6-32 6-32 6-39 6-39 6-47 6-47 Service Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Air Cleaner Automatic Transaxle Fluid Engine Coolant Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs Windshield WiperBlade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Chevrolet 6-50 6-5 1 6-5 1 6-52 6-52 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-54 6-54 6-54 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-56 6-56 6-66 Cleaning the Built-InChild Restraint Care of Safety Belts and Built-inChild Restraint Harness Cleaning Glass Surfaces Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades Weatherstrips Cleaning the Outside of Your Chevrolet Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped) Cleaning Tires Sheet Metal Damage Finish Damage Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Appearance Care Materials Chart Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) Service Parts IdentificationLabel Electrical System Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6-1 Service Your Chevrolet dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with We it. hope you’llgo to your dealerfor all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: n @H” Delco Doing Your Own Service Work If you want todo some of your own service work, you’ll want to get the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service your Chevrolet than this manual can.To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 6-2 You can be injured and yourvehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. 0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task. 0 Be sure touse the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can beeasily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners,parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can affect the aifflowaround it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshieldwasher performance. Check with your Chevrolet dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. At a minimum,it should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specificationshave been developed by the AmericanAutomobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicleperformance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines. Be sure the postedoctane is at least 87.If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavyknocking noise when you drive. If it’s badenough, it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at 87octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.But don’t worry if you heara little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up ahill. That’s normal, and you don’thave to buy ahigher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhoodtune-up label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not availablein states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, butemission control system performance may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.If this occurs, return to your authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis todetermine the cause of failure. Inthe event it isdetermined that the cause of the conditionis the typeof fuels used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty. Some gasolines thatare not reformulatedfor low emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines.I€fuels containing “T are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel may turn on.If this occurs, return to your authorized Chevrolet dealerfor service. Fuels in Foreign Countries To provide cleaner air,all gasolines in the United States If you planon driving in another country outside the United are now required to contain additives that will help prevent depositsfrom forming in your engine andfuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to thefuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to help clean theair.General Motors recommends that you use these gasolinesif they comply with the specifications described earlier. NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contams methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubberparts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommendedin the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your m a n @ . To check onfuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business the in country where you’ll be driving. You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). General Motors International Product Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7 6-4 Filling Your Tank A CAUTION: Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. Don't smoke if you're near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline. , . gr "$ 6-5 The tethered cap is behind a hinged door on theleft side of your vehicle. I L If you get gasoline on yourselfand then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen if your tankis nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any“hiss” noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfacesas soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Chevrolet” in the Index. While refueling, let thecap hang by the tether below the fuel fill opening. To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring init; if you let go of the cap too soon,it will spring back to the right. 6-6 When you put the cap back on, turnit to the right (clockwise) until youhear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. I NOTICE: If you needa new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in the Index. Checking ThingsUnder the Hood An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even whenthe engineis not running. Keep hands, clothingand tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan. Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washerand other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful notto drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 6-7 Hood Release To open the hood,first pull thehandle located inside the vehicle near the parking brake pedal. Then go to the frontof the vehicle and release the secondary hood release. Lift the hood. 6-8 r When you open the hood on the 3 100 (Code M) engine, you’ll see: A. Engine Coolant Reservoir B. Radiator Fill Cap C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir D. Engine Oil Fill Cap E. Engine Oil Dipstick F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick G. Brake Fluid Reservoir H. Air Filter I. Remote Positive Battery Terminal J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir K. Battery (located under Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir) When you open the hoodon the 3.4L DOHC (Code X) engine, you’ll see: A. Engine Coolant Reservoir B. Radiator Fill Cap C . Power Steering Fluid Reservoir D. Engine Oil FillCap E. Engine Oil Dipstick 6-10 E Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick G. Brake Fluid Reservoir H. Air Filter I. RemotePositiveBattery Terminal . Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir K. Battery (located under Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir) J Before closing the hood,be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then just pull the hood down and closeit firmly. Engine Oil LOW OIL If the LOW OIL light on the instrument panel comes on, it means you need tocheck your engine oil level right away. For more information, see “Low Oil Level Light” in the Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. It’s a goodidea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order toget an accurate reading, theoil must be warm andthe vehicle mustbe on level ground. 3100 (Code M) Engine 3.4L DOHC (Code X) Engine The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near the front of the engine. Turn off the engine and givethe oil a few minutes to drain back into theoil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 6-11 Checking Engine Oil When to Add Oil If you have the3.4L DOHC engine (VIN Code X), allow up to 20 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. If the oil is at orbelow the lower mark,then you’ll need to add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kindof oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. 3.4L DOHC (Code X) Engine 6-12 What nd of Oil to Use Oils recommendedfor your vehiclecan be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oilhas been certifiedby the American Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use anyoil which does not carry this Starburstsymbol. If you change your own oil, be sure youuse oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. 3100 (Code M) Engine The engine oil fill cap is located toward thefront of the engine near theyellow-looped engine oil dipstick. Be sure tofill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou’re through. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure theoil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. You should also use theproper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in thefollowing chart: 6-13 RECOMMENDED SAL VlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE OllS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. WOK FOR THIS SYMBOL HOT WEATHER + 38 + 27 + 16 +4 -7 -10 - COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SA€ 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6-14 As shown in the chart,if you have the 3 100 engine, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle. However,you can use S A E 1OW-30 if it’s going tobe 0°F (-18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,such as SAE 2OW-50. RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTEDTEMPERATURERANGE. I HOT WEATHER As shown in thechart, if you have the 3.4L DOHC engine, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colder than 60O F (16 O C) before your nextoil change. When it’s very cold, you should use S A E 5W-30. These numbers on an oil container showits viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils, such as SAE 2OW-50. NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. PREFERRED GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. .bow WF SAE sw-30 (-18%) COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED I If you are in an area where thetemperature falls below -20°F (-29”C), consider using either anSAE 5W-30 synthetic oilor an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold startingand better protectionfor your engine at extremely low temperatures. 6-15 If none of them is true, usethe long triphighway maintenance schedule.Change the oil andfilter every Don’t add anything to your oil. Your Chevrolet dealer is 7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months -- whichever ready to advise if you think something should be added. occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causesengine oil to When to Change Engine Oil break down slower. If any one of these is true for you, use theshort tripkity (See “Change OilSoon Light” in the Index.) maintenance schedule: Engine Oil Additives 0 Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularlyimportant when outside temperatures are below freezing. 0 Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). 0 Most trips are through dusty areas. 0 a carrier on topof You frequently tow a trailer or use your vehicle. The vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application. What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothingor rags containing usedengine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be areal threat to theenvironment. If you change your own oil,be sure to drain all free-flowing oil of oil Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead, then you need to change youroil and filter every recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If 3,000 miles (5 OOO km)or 3 months -- whichever occurs you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, first. (See “Change Oil Soon Light” in the Index.) ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. 0 6-16 Air Cleaner I Pull out the filter.Be sure to install the air filter and install thecover tightly when youare finished. To check or replace the air filter, remove the four screws and pull off the cover. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento replace the air filter. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”in the Index. 6-17 Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleansthe air, it stops flameif the engine backfhes. If it isn’t there,and the engine backfhes, you could beburned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the e n h e with the air cleaner off. NOTICE: A good time tocheck your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicleis mainly driven underone or more of these conditions: 0 In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches90°F (32°C) or higher. 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing. If the air cleaner isoff, a backfire can cause a dirt can easily get damaging engine fire. And, See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. into your engine, which will damage it. Always have theair cleaner in place when you’re driving. 6-18 How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at yourChevrolet dealership Service Department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or youcould get a false reading on the dipstick. Wait at least30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid levelif you have been driving: When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93 "C). NOTICE: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid. _ _ - Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km)when outsidetemperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may have to drive longer. - 6-19 Checking the Fluid Level Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever ia PARK (P). With yaw foot on the brakepedal, move the shift lever through each gear range,pausing for about I .- ,Y three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARR (P). Let the engine run atidle for three to five minutes. Then, without shutting off the engine,follow these steps: 0 3100 (Code M) Engine 3.4L DOHC(Code X) Engine 1 . The transaxle fluid dipstick handleis the red loop near the backof the engine. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it witha clean ragor paper towel. 2. Push it back in all theway, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 6-20 :. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched areaon the dipstick. 1. Pull out the dipstick, 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluidat the dipstick hole to bringit to the proper level. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t oveflll. 3100 (Code M) Engine 3.4 L DOHC (Code X) Engine 3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level.The fluid level mustbe in the cross-hatched area. 4. If the fluid levelis in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in allthe way. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluidto use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’in the Index. I I NOTICE: We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluidlevel as described under “How to Check.” 4. When the correct fluid levelis obtained, push the dipstick back inall the way. 6-21 Engine Coolant The cooling s stem in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km) whichever occurs first,if you add only DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant whenit is low.If you have a problem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index. A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant will: I NOTICE: - When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolantwill require change sooner at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occursfirst. Damage causedby the use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. -- 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). 0 Give boiling protection up 265 to O F (129 C). 0 Protect against rust and corrosion. What to Use 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. Use a mixtureof one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL@ coolant which won’t damage aluminumparts. If you use this mixture, you don’t need toadd anything else. O 6-22 I /!1 CAUTION: Adding only plainwater to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper coolant mixwill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix. With plain water or the wrong mix,your engine could get toohot but you wouldn’t getthe overheat warning. Your engine couldcatch fire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. ~ NOTICE: If you usean improper coolant mix,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water inthe mix can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. [f youhave to add coolant more than four times a year, nave your dealercheck your cooling system. NOTICE: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. 6-23 If this lightcomes on, it means you’re low on Checking Coolant engine coolant. LOW COOLANT Adding Coolant . .‘ When your engine is cold, the coolant level should at be the COLD mark or alittle higher. When yourengine is warm, the level shouldbe up to the HOT mark or a little higher. 6-24 If you need more coolant, addthe proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spillit. If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add coolant to the radiator. (See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.) Radiator Pressure Cap 1 NOTICE: I’urning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator arehot can allow steam and scalding liquidsto blow out and burn you badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have toadd coolant at the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator arehot. -- Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installedto prevent coolant lossand possible engine damage from overheating.Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflowtube on the radiator filler neck. -- I When you replace your radiator pressurecap, an AC@ cap is recommended. Thermostat You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engineparts arehot enough. Don’t spill coolant aonhot engine. Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the flow of coolant throughthe radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. When you replace your thermostat, anAC@thermostat is recommended. 6-25 Power Steerlag Fluid 3100 (Code M) Engine 3.4L DOHC (Code X) Engine When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. 6-26 What to Use To determine what kindof fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid,be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehiclein anarea where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. NOTICE: 0 0 Adding Washer Fluid 0 0 When using concentrated washerfluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washersystem. Also, water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tankif it is completely full. Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. Open thecap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. 6-27 Brakes Brake Fluid leaking outof the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top OF’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your liningsare worn, then you’llhave too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. A CAUTION: I Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake liningwear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reasonis that fluidis 6-28 If you havetoo much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluidwill burn if the engineis hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. BRAKE When yourbrake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light willcome on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. What toAdd When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11’ (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. Always clean thebrake fluid reservoircap and the area around the cap before removingit. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. 1 of fluid inyour brake With the wrong kind system, your brakesmay not workwell, or they may not even work at all. This could causea crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. NOTICE: a Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid. a If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index. 6-29 Brake Wear Your Chevrolet has front disc brakesand rear drum brakes if it is equipped with the3100 engine. Ithas four-wheel disc brakesif it is equipped with the3.4L DOHC engine. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes arefirst applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel in nuts the high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn proper sequence to GM specifications. and new pads are needed.The sound may come andgo or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing you are pushing on the brakepedal firmly). noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspectedeach time the tires are removedfor rotation or changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too. The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced ascomplete axle sets. an accident. When you hear the brake wear See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. manual under PartC “Periodic Maintenance Inspections”. r NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. i 6-30 Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if thebrake pedal does not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase pedal in travel. This could be a signof brake trouble. that are wrongfor your vehicle, thebalance between your front and rearbrakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performanceyou’ve come to expect can change in many other ways ifsomeone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. Brake Adjustment Battery Every time you applythe brakes, with orwithout the vehicle moving, yourbrakes adjust for wear. Every new Chevrolet has a DelcoFreedom’ battery. You never have to add water toone of these. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend Delco a Freedom battery. Getone that has thereplacement number shown on the original battery’s label. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicleis complex. Its many partshave to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is tohave really good braking. Your vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-quality GM brake replacement parts. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings weardown and you have to have new ones put in -- be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings Vehicle Storage If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down. 6-31 ’ A CAUTION: I Batteries have acidthat can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you aren’t careful. See66Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for yaur audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Featwe” in the Index. Bulb Replacement In this sectionyou’ll find directionsfor changing the bulbs in some of the lamps on your Chevrolet. See “Replacement Bulbs”in the Indexto find the typeof bulb you need to use. 6-32 Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION: I Halogen bulbs have pressuriz 1s inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured.Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bnlb package. Headlamps 1. Open the hood. 2. Press and turn the bulb a quarter-turn (to the leftfor the driver’sside; to the rightfor the passenger’s side) and removeit from the retaining ring by gently pulling it back and away from the headlamp. Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp 112. ...L.... ........ e k. 3. Remove the electricalconnector from the bulb by raising the locktab and pulling the connector away from the bulb's base. 4. Install the electrical connectorto the bulb. the smallest tab on 5 . Install the new bulb by inserting the bulb baseinto the matching notchin the retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn to the right until it stops. 6. Close the hood. 1. Open the hood. Thereis one flap on each side of the radiator. 6-33 2, Open the flap by lifting the snap screw. 6-34 3. Position the radiator air side baffle aside and remove the two nuts (pliers maybe required). 4. Slide the headlamp assembly outboard and gently pull the inside of the assembly away from the vehicle. 6-35 Center High-Mouated Stoplamp 2. Turn the socket tothe left unti1 it stops and pull the bulb and socket out of the centerhigh-mounted stoplamp assembly. 3. Push in the bulb, turn it to the left and pull it oat of the socket, 4. Push the new bdb into the socket and turn it to the fight. 5. Replace the bulb and socket in the assembly. 1. Open the trunk lid. Locate the stoplamp behind the rear seats, infront of the trunk hinges. 6-36 I I Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp 5. To remove a socket, press the tab, turn the socket to 1. Open the trunk.Remove the convenience net if you have one. Unhook the net from the upper wingnut. 6. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it. d- I d 2. Remove the upper (convenience net) wing nut, if equipped. 3. Pull the carpet away from the rearof the vehicle. the left and pullit out. 7. Push the new bulb into the socket. 8. Replace the socket in the assembly. 9. Tighten the socket by turning it to the right. 10. Install the assembly andthe two lower wing nuts. 11. Replace the carpeting. 12. Replace the upper (convenience net) wing nut, if equipped. 13. Replace the convenience net, if equipped. 4. Unscrew the tworemaining wing nuts and pull the assembly from the body carefully. 6-37 Back-up Lamp Dome Lamp 1. Open the trunk. The back-up lamp bulbs are in the rear of the trunk lid. 1. Grasp the front and rear centerof the domelamp cover at the same time. Then squeeze and pull downward. (To help pry the sides loose, a flat-blade screwdriver may be used as an aid during this procedure). 2. Press the tab on the socket, turn the socket to the left and pull it out. 2. Remove the old bulb from the small prongs extending from the domelamp base plate; hook the new bulb onto the prongs. 3. To replace the bulb cover, centerit over the base plate, making sure both the cover and the base plate line up properly. Snap the cover firmly into place. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your Chevrolet dealer service department. 3. To remove the bulb, pullit out of the socket. Do not twist the bulb. 4. Push the new bulb into the socket. 5 . Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to replace the socket. 6-38 Windshield Wiper Blade Retdacement 4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass, push the releaseclip from under the blade connecting point and pull the blade assembly down towards the glass to remove it fromthe wipe arm. 5. Push the new wiper blade securelyon the wiper arm until you hear the release clip “click” into place. For wiper blade replacement lengthand type, also see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. Tires Your new Chevroletcomes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details. Replacement bladesfor your vehicle are 22 inches (559 mm) in length. 1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting. 2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the outer positions ofthe wiper pattern.The blades are more accessible for removalheplacement while in this position. 3. Pull the windshield wiper arm awayfrom the windshield. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. CAUTION: (Continued) 6-39 NOTICE: 0 0 Underinflated tirespose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tiresare cold. Overinflated tiresare more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. I- 0 Inflation -- Tire Pressure The Tire-Loading Informationlabel, which is on the inside of the trunk lid shows the correct inflation pressures €or your tireswhen they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). 6-40 Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires donsthave enoughair (underinflation), you can get the following: Too much flexing 0 Too much heat Tire overloading 0 Bad wear 0 Bad handling 0 Bad fuel economy. If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can getthe following: 0 Unusual wear 0 Bad handling 0 Rough ride Needless damage fromroad hazards. When to Check Check your tires once a monthor more. Don’t forgetyour compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell ifyour tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflatedeven when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. When rotating your tires,always use the correct rotation They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. pattern shown here. Tire Inspection and Rotation Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. Tires should be rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later inthis section for more information. After the tireshave been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make certain thatall wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more uniform wearfor all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals. I Rust ordirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can makewheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In anemergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper orwire brush later, if you off. (See need to, to get all the rust or dirt “Changing aFlat Tire” in theIndex.) 6-42 The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired wellbecause of the size or location of the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kindand size of tires you need,look at the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installed on your vehicle whenit was new had a TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPCSpec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that are designed to give properendurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things duringnormal service on your vehicle.If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number willbe followed by an “MS” (for mudand snow). If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates tothe system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading systemdoes . not apply todeep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. 6-43 6-44 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tirelife and best overall performance. Scheduled wheel alignment and wheelbalancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pullingone way or the other, thealignment may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, your wheels may need tobe rebalanced. Wheel Replacement I Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nutskeep coming loose, the wheel, wheel boltsand wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, whichcan sometimes be repaired). See your Chevrolet dealer if anyof these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel shouldhave the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace anyof your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replacethem only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel boltsand wheel nutsfor your Chevrolet model. A [ON: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou lose control. You could have acollision in which you or others couldbe injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. I NOTICE: The wrongwheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. 6-45 Used Replacement Wheels NOTICE: (Continued) Use another type of traction device only ifits Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you haveto replace a wheel, usea new GM original equipmentwheel. Tire Chains INOTICE: If your Chevrolet hasP225/60R16size tires,don’t use tire chains. Theycan damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance. NOTICE: (Continued) 6-46 manufacturer recommends it for use onyour vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’scontacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them onthe front tires. If you haveother tires, usetire chains only where SAE legal and only when you must. Use only Class “S” type chainsthat arethe proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast or spinning thewheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. Appearance Care Remember, cleaningproducts can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burstinto flame if you strike a match or getthem on a hot partof the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your Chevrolet, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows whenyou’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean your vehicle: Gasoline Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle: Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach ReducingAgents Cleaning the Insideof Your Chevrolet Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. 0 CarbonTetrachloride Your Chevrolet dealer has two cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter anda foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather. 0 Acetone Here are some cleaning tips: 0 Paint Thinner 0 Turpentine 0 Lacquer Thinner 1. Always read the instructions onthe cleaner label. 2. Clean up stains as soon as youcan -- before they set. 3. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. 4. Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area. 5 . If a ringforms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. Benzene Naphtha Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. 6-47 Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric Ushg Solvent-Qpe Cleaner on Fabric 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. First, seeif you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and stains will clean off better with @ s t water and mild soap. 2, Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label. 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. 5. As soon as you’ve clemed the section, use a sponge to remove the suds. 6. Rinse the section with clean, a wet sponge. 7. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth. 8. Dry it immediately with a blow dryer. 9. Wipe with a clean cloth. . I 6-48 If you need to use a solvent: 1. Gently scrape excess soilfrom.the trim material with a clean,dull knife or scraper. 2. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths (preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning shauld start at the outside of the stain, “feathering” toward the center. 3. Keep changingto a clean sectionof the cloth. 4. When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry a the areawith a blow dryer to help prevent cleaning ring. Fabric Protection Your Chevrolet has upholstery andcarpet that has been treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabrics by repellingoil and water, which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery and carpet often to keepit looking new. Further information on cleaning is available by calling 1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167). Special Cleaning Problems Greasy orOily Stains Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee withcream, chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphaltcan be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier. Non-Greasy Stains Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks,wine, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, thensponge the soiled area with cool water. 2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier. 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area witha waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner. Combination Stains Stains causedby candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stainscan be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if left 3. If a stain remains, cleanit with solvent-type cleaner. on a vehicle's seatfabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner will dissolve themand may cause them to spread. 6-49 Cleaning Vinyl Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel Use warm water anda clean cloth. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield and even makeit difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. 0 Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.You may have todo it more than once. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get themoff quickly. Use a clean cloth anda vinyl/leather cleaner.See your dealer forths product. Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipedry with a soft cloth. Then,let the leather dry naturally.Do not use heat todry. 0 For stubbornstains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. 0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leather. 0 Soiled or stainedleather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. 6-50 Cleaning the Built-InChild Restraint Your built-in child restraint may be cleaned with mild soap and lukewarm water. Don’t use household cleaners. They may weaken the harness or damage plastic parts. The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the child restraint cushion and seatback with fastener strips. You can remove the pad, machine wash it in cold water ona gentle cycle and tumble dry it on a low heat setting. Never bleachor iron the pad, and don’t dry clean it. Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Restraint Harness Keep the safety belts and the built-in child restraint harness clean and dry. Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built-in child restraint harness. If you do, they may be severely weakened. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean the safety belts and the child restraint harness only with mildsoap and lukewarm water. Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should becleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner (GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they mayhave to be scrapedoff later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the insideof the rear window, an electricdefogger element may be damaged. Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid. Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside the of windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ Powder (non-scratching glass cleaning powder),GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beadsdo not form when you rinse it with water. Cleaning the Outsideof Your Chevrolet The paint finishon your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’sfinish is to keep it clean by washingit often with lukewarm or cold water. Don’t wash your vehiclein the direct raysof the sun. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dishor car washing (mild detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents thatare petroleum based,or Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaning agents and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield the surface,or they could stain. Dry the finish with a washer solvent. Then rinsethe blade with water. soft, clean chamoisor an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter Weatherstrips your vehicle. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application maybe required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”in the Index.) Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid hand, dishor vehicle washing (mild detergent)soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your Chevrolet by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish.You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your Chevrolet garaged or covered whenever possible. Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped) Your Chevrolet has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with Always use waxes and polishes thatare non-abrasive and mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After made for a basecoatklearcoat paint finish. rinsing thoroughly,dry with a soft clean towel.A wax may then be applied. NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leaveswirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finishif they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle assoon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. The surface of these wheelsis similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damage the surface. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash that has silicon carbidetire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels. Cleaning Tires Underbody Maintenance To clean your tires,use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. NOTICE: When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the paint finish. Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicleis damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fracturesor deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials availablefrom your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areasof finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. 6-54 At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaceson your vehicle.This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Chevrolet will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Appearance Care Materials Chart 1 I I 12345725 I 12 oz. (0.354 L) I Shine Silicone Tire 12377964 16 oz.Cleaning (0.473 L) Wax 12377966 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Spot cleans gives paint luster high and See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. I I Shines tires Protects removes finish and scratches fine **Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the model designation, paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment. Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. \ ASSEMBLY E N G l N E h Q 7f CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifierfor your Chevrolet. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side.You can see it if you look throughthe windshield from outside your vehicle.The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify yourengine, specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label You’ll findthis label on your spare tire cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is: yourVIN, / - I 6-56 Electrical System Add-on Electrical Equipment NOTICE: Don’t add anything electrical to your Chevrolet unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle hasan air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your Chevrolet, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet” in the Index. Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Breakers The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker in the underhoodelectrical center. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp system checked right away. The wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop untilthe motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers inthe fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit untilthe problem is fixed. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replacethe fuse. Be sure you replace a badfuse with a newone of the identical size and rating. Instrument Panel Fuse Block Some fuses are in a fuse block onthe passenger side of the instrument panel. Pull off thecover labeled FUSES to expose the fuses. Additional fuses arein the underhood electrical centers on the right and left sides of the engine compartment. 6-57 Fuse 1 4 5 6 10 11 12 Circuit Breaker C D 13 Description Power Windows Power Seats 14 Description CIGARETTE LIGHTER-- Instrument Panel and Console Cigarette Lighter WAC-- WACControl Assembly Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL Module, HVAC Control Head, Blower Control Switch HAZARD FLASHER R.H. SPOT LAMP (S.E.O.) UP ELECTRONICS BATTERY FEED -- Chime Module, Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM), Theft-Deterrent Module, Radio, ALDL STARTERRELAY ANTI-THEFTPCM-- Theft-Deterrent Module A B S -- Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM),A B S Relay HVAC BLOWER MOTOR -- Blower Motor Relay Fuse 15 19 20 21 22 23 25 28 29 30 Description L.H. SPOT LAMP (S.E.O.) POWER ACCESSORY (Power)#l -Door LockSwitches, Trunk Courtesy Lamp, O/S Mirror Switch POWER ACCESSORY #2--(Sunroof) Control Unit AIR BAG-- Air BagSystem CRUISE CONTROL--Cruise Control Cut-Out Switch STOPLAMPS -- TCCBrake Switch ENGLISWMETRIC (S.E.O.) CTSY LAMPS -- Vanity Mirrors, I P Compartment Lamp, Header Courtesy and Reading Lamp,US Lighted Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp WIPER -- Wiper Switch TURN SIGNAL -- Turn Signal Flasher Fuse 32 33 37 38 39 41 42 Description POWER LOCKS -- Door Lock Relay, Keyless Entry Receiver DRL MODULE REAR DEFOG--HVAC Control Assembly Rear Window Defogger Switch RADIO -- Radio, Steering Wheel Radio Switches, Power Drop I/P ELECTRONICS IGNITION FEED -- Headlamp Switch, TCCBrake Switch, Instrument Cluster, Chime Module, Keyless Entry Receiver, BTSI Switch POWER DROP ENHANCED EVAP. SOLENOID 6-59 --- Underhood Electrical Center Passenger’s Side Some €uses are in the underhood electrical center on the passenger’s side of the engine cornpartmeat. 0 0 0 RICMPT REL PCMBAT A/C CONT TRANS -F/INJN PCM IGN Fuse R/CMPT REL PCM BAT A/C CONT TRANS 6-60 ELEKIGN I I Description Remote Trunk Release,Back-up Lamps Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Relay, Fan Cont#l and #2 Relay A/C CMPR Relay(VIN M only) Automatic Transaxle,Transaxle Range Switch (VIN M only) Fuse F/INJN PCM IGN ELEK IGN 10 12 13 Description Fuel Injectors Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor (VIN X only), EGR, CCP, Oxygen Sensor, Vacuum Canister Switch Electronic Ignition (EI) Control Module UP Fuse Block Passenger’s Side Underhood Electrical Center, FPMP Relay, Cooling Fans #I and #2, Ignition Relay, P/N Switch FAN CONT #I Relay Relay 14 15 16 17 18 Description FUEL PUMP AIC CMPR FAN CONT #2 -- Secondary Cooling Fan (Passenger’sSide) FAN CONT #1-- Primary Cooling Fan (Driver’sSide) Ignition Relay 6-61 I -- Underhood Electrical Center Driver’s Side no0 FAN #3 PARKLPS HORN uno ABS m 6-62 1 12 Fuse FAN#3 PARK LPS Description FAN CONT #3 Relay Headlamp Switch HORN Horn Relay, Underhood Lamp ABS Anti-Lock Brake System Fuse Description 11 IGN SW1 -- I/P Fuse Block: Radio, Wiper, HVAC, ABS and Turn Signal Fuses PWR WDO and Circuit Breaker D; Passenger’s Side Underhood Electrical Center: F/IJN, ECM IGN, TCC, ENG EMIS and ELEK IGNFuses 12 HD LPS -- Circuit Breaker to Headlamp Switch 13 ABS -- ABS Relay Relay Description 14 ABS -- Anti-Lock Brake System 15 FAN CONT #3 -- Secondary Cooling Fan (Passenger’s Side) 16 HORN Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamps Bulb Number Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 156 or 3057 Center High-Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891T2 Front Parkingnurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3357NA Headlamp, High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 9006 Headlamp, Low-Beam .................... 194 Sidemarker, Front. ........................ 194 Sidemarker,Rear ......................... 3057 Stop/TailiTurnSignal ..................... Interior Lamps Bulb Number Dome ............................. 10230955 * For serviceinformation on these bulbs, contact your Chevrolet dealer service department. 6-63 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information. Automatic Transaxle Pan Removal and Replacement ........................................ After Complete Overhaul ........................................... 7 quarts (6.7 L) 10 quarts (9.5 L) When drainingheplacing converteT more fluid may be needed. Cooling System Including Reservoir 3100 (Code M) ................................................ 11.6 quarts (10.94 L) 12.3 quarts (11.65L) 3.4L DOHC (Code X) ........................................... Refrigerant (R=134a), Air Conditioning* .......................... 1.88 pounds (0.85 kg) Engine Crankcase Oil and Filter Change 3100(CodeM) .................................................. 4.5quarts(4.2L) 3.4LDOHC (Code X) ............................................. 5.5 quarts (5.2 L) Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Length ....................................................... 22inches(559mm) . Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hook Fuel Tank 3100 (Code M) ................................................ 16.6 gallons (62.8 L) 16.6 gallons (62.8 L) 3.4L DOHC (Code X) .......................................... - *See “Air Conditioning Refrigerants” later in this section. Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. See “RecommendedFluids and Lubricants” in the Index. 6-64 Engine Specifications Type .................................. Displacement ........................... Compression Ratio ....................... Firing Order ............................ ThermostatTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3100 (CodeM) V6 191 CID (3100) 9.6: 1 1-2-3-4-5-6 195°F (91°C) 160 @ 5200 3.4L DOHC (Code X) V6 207 CID (3.4L) 9.25: 1 1-2-3-4-5-6 195°F (91°C) 215 @ 5200 6-65 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Air Cleaner Filter All Engines .............. Battery 3100 (CodeM) ......... 3.4L DOHC (Code X) .... Engine Oil Filter 3100(Code M) ......... 3.4L DOHC (Code X) .... PCV Valve 3100 (Code M) ......... 3.4L DOHC (Code X) . . . . Radiator Cap All Engines .............. Spark Plugs 3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . 3.4L DOHC (CodeX) 6-66 .... A1208C 600 CCA 690 CCA PF47 PF51 CV892C CV895C RC27 AC Type 41-940 Gap: 0.060” (.152 cm) AC Q p e 41-919 Gap: 0.045” (.114 cm) Vehicle Dimensions Wheelbase .......... 107.5 inches (273.0 cm) Tread Width (Front) ... 59.1 inches (151.35 cm) Tread Width (Rear) ..... . 5 9 inches (149.4 cm) Length ............. 200.9 inches (510.4 cm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.5 inches (182.6 cm) Height ............... 55.2 inches (140.3cm) Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerantsare the same. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the properrefrigerant is used. If you’re notsure, ask your Chevrolet dealer. & NOTES 6-67 b% 6-68 NOTES 0Section 7 MaintenanceSchedule This section covers the maintenance requiredfor your Chevrolet.Your vehicle needs these servicesto retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance. 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-37 7-37 7-37 7-38 7-38 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment How This Section is Organized Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices Using Your Maintenance Schedule Selecting the RightSchedule Part B: OwnerChecks and Services At Each FuelFill At Least Once a Month At Least Twicea Year At Least Oncea Year 7-4 1 7-4 1 7-4 1 7-41 7-4 1 7-4 1 7-42 7-44 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot andSeal Inspection ExhaustSystemInspection RadiatorandHeaterHoseInspection Throttle Linkage Inspection BrakeSystemInspection Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Part E: Maintenance Record 7-1 I IMPORTANT: KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED I I Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet,or your Chevrolet dealer for details. 7-2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the qualityof the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly. How This Section is Organized The remainder of this sectionis divided into five parts: “Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServices” shows what tohave done and how often.Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’sservice department or another qualified service centerdo these jobs. a vehicle can Performing maintenance work on be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work onlyif you have the required know-how and the propertools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work. “Part B: Owner Checks andServices” tells you what should be checked and when. Italso explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle good in condition. “Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that yourChevrolet dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform. “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained.These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself orhave it done. “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for you to record themaintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to writeit down in this part.This will help you determine when your nextmaintenance should be done. In addition,it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs. If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. 7-3 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to helpyou keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and notehow you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your Chevrolet dealer. The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedPain rt D. Make sure whoever services your vehicleuses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. These schedules arefor vehicles that: 0 carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s Tire-Loading Information label.See “Loading Your Vehicle’’ inthe Index. 0 are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. 0 use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index. Selecting the Right Schedule First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow: This part tells you the maintenance servicesyou should have done and whenyou should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts. 7-4 I . , Maintenance Schedule I Wip/City Short Definition I Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any one of these conditionsis true for your vehicle: Most trips are less than5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing. 0 Most trips include extensive idling (suchas frequent driving in stop-and-go traffic). Most trips are through dusty areas. You frequently tow a traileror use a carrier on topof your vehicle. If the vehicle is usedfor delivery service, police, taxi or other commercia1 application. One of the reasons you should follow thisschedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is thatthese conditions cause engine oil to break down soone7: Short Trip/City Intervals Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Every 6,000 Miles (10000 km): Tire Rotation. Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Every 30,000 Miles (50000 km): Air Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 50,000 Miles(83 000 km):Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditions only). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km):Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. At 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) Then Every 15,000 Miles(25 000 km): Camshaft Timing Belt Inspection (3.4LCode X engine only). Every 100,000 Miles(166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km):Cooling System Service (or every 60 months, whicheveroccurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure tofollow the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages. -- Maintenance Schedule Follow this maintenanceschedule only if none of the conditions from theShort TripKity Maintenance Schedule is true.Do not use thisschedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing, drivenin a dusty area or used off paved roads. Use the Short TripKity schedule for these conditions. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slowex Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation. Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter 'Replacement. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines Inspection. Every 50,000 Miles(83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle Service (severe conditionsonly). Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection. At 60,000 Miles (100000 km) Then Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Camshaft Timing Belt Inspection (3.4L Code X engine only). Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km):Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Every 150,000 Miles(240 000 km): Cooling System Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first). These intervals only summarize maintenance services. Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on thefollowing pages. -- 7-6 I i I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-1 The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles (166 000 km) shouldbe performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 krn). 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Footnotes The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection’’ under “Periodic Maintenance Inspection” in PartC of this schedule. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). I 9,000 Miles (15 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) i 1 t u o ACTUALMILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 12,000 Miles (20 000 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 0Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-9 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Scb-We. lS9000Miles (30 000 km) I 21,000 Miles (35 000 km) 0Change engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. I DATE I I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED €&X I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 27,900 Miles (45 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE ’ SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-11 1 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 1 33,000 Miles (55000 km) Change engine oil and Mter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. I DATE ACTUALMILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every I 39,000 Miles (65000 km) 3 months, whichever occurs first). Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE BY: 7-13 I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule I 42,000 Miles (70000 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission ControlService. 0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) - (.Seefuotnote +.) I ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 48,000 Miles (80 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches90 O F (32 O C) or lugher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluidandfilter do not require changing. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-15 I I 3 I 1 , Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 54,000 Miles (90 000 km) I 51,000 Miles (85 000 km) 1 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I I BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED L 7-16 J I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 57,000 Miles (95000 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 0Vehicles with 3.4L Code X engine only: Inspect camshaft timing belt. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: (Continued) n 4n I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) 63,000 Miles (105 000 km) 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage 0Change engine oil and filter (or every or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any damage. Replaceparts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 3 months, whichever occurs first). DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE n 4 n BY An Emission Control Service. DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE BY: I I I I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 69,000 Miles (115 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ inthe Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE BY: , 7-19 I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) in dusty conditions. Replacefilter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) c1 Inspect camshaft timing belt. An Emission Control Service. d 1 ACTUALMILEAGESERVICED 7-20 BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedu 78,000 Miles (130 000 km) 81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE ISERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule I 84,000 Miles (140 000 km) 87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. An Emission Control Sewice. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) t ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-22 1 I I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. Inspect camshaft timing belt. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote ?.) 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 17Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-23 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 93,000 Miles (155 000 km) I 96,000 Miles (160 000 km) every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission ControlService. 0Change engine oil and filter (or 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I I 1 1 DATE ACTUAL ACTUAL MILEAGE IL 7-24 MILEAGE SERVICED BY: I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule 99,000 Miles (165 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. I 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches 90OF (32°C) or higher. I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY: I (Continued) 7-25 I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. Ifyou do not useyour vehicle under anyof these conditions, thefluid andfilter do not require changing. I 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. An Emission ControlService. DATE 7-26 ACTUAL MILEAGE 1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule I 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) The services shown inthis schedule upto 100,000 miles (166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000 miles (166 000 km)at the sameintervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles(240 000 km) should be performedat the same interval after 150,000 miles(240 000 km). Footnotes The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.) + A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance Inspections’’in Part C of this schedule. 7-27 ILong Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 15,000 Miles (25 000 km) Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.) 22,500 Miles (37 500 km) 0Change engineoil and filter (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission Control Sewice. I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.) DATE 7-28 I ACTUAL MILEAGE lsERvIcED BY:( I LongTripmighwayMaintenanceSchedule I 30,000 Miles (50 000 km) 37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) Replace air cleaner filter. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.) An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y 7-29 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 45,000 Miles (75 000 km) Change engineoil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) I 50,000 Miles (83 000 km) 0Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90O F (32°C) or higher. - In hilly or mountainous terrain. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as foundin taxi, police or delivery service. I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluid andfilterdo not require changing. DATE SERVICED ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: 7-30 ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE BY: 1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 52,500 Miles (87 500 km) 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An EmissionControl Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) 0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. ACTUAL MILEAGE 1 SERVICED BY: (Continued) R 31 (g Tripmighway Maintenance Schedul&l 60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) 67,500 Miles (112 500 km) 0Vehicles with 3.4L Code X engine only: 0Change engine oil andfilter (or every Inspect camshaft timing belt. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Replace air cleaner filter. 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replaceparts as needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service. Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Indexfor proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Long TripEIighway Maintenance Schedule 75,000 Miles (125 000 km) 82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and 0Inspect camshaft timing belt. Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) An Emission Control Service. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote +.) I I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 3 I BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: n aa Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 90,000 Miles (150 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage 12 months, whichever occursfirst). or leaks. Inspectfuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.) 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect camshaft timing belt. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote T.) 0Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission ControlService. DATE 7-34 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 97,500 Miles (162 500 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Inspect spark plug wires. 12 months, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service. 0Replace spark plugs. 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and An Emission Control Service. Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) t 0Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: - In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 O F (32°C) or higher. SERVICED BY: ACTUAL MILEAGE I I (Continued) Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule 150,000 Miles (240 000 km) 100,000 Miles (166 000 km) (Continued) 0Drain, flush and refill cooling system - In hilly or mountainous terrain. (or every60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. - When doing frequent trailer towing. - Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. I f you do not useyour vehicle under any of these conditions, thefluid andfilterdo not require changing. An Emission Control Service. I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 7-36 BY: I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED 1 I BY: Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check Listed below are ownerchecks and services which should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability andemission control performance of your vehicle. Check theengine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@ coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure theyare the proper ones, as shown in Part D. At Each FuelFill It isimportantfor you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Engine Oil Level Check Check theengine oil level andadd the proper oilif necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Indexfor further details. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the if windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details. At Least Oncea Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See “Tires” in the Index for further details. Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details. 7-37 At Least Twicea Year Restraint System Check Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.See “Automatic Transaxle”in the Index.A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle has a built-in child At Least Oncea Year restraint, also periodically make sure the harness straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged Key Lock Cylinders Service safety belt and built-in child restraint system parts. If Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built-inspecified in Part D. child restraint systemfrom doing itsjob, have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts or harness Body Lubrication Service straps replaced. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including [nose for the hood, rearcompartment, glove box door and the console Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, door. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bagsystem lubrication may be required when exposed to a does not need regularmaintenance.) corrosive environment. Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking.Replace blade inserts that appearworn or damaged or that streakor m i s s areas of the windshield.Also see “Wiper Blades, Cleaning” in the Index. 7-38 Starter Switch Check 7 When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. Ifit does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. NOTE: Do not usethe accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only inPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service. Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check I /h CAUTIC’ When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. Ifit does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply theparking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary). NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the key tothe RUN position, but don’tstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever ofout PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever moves outof PARK (P), your vehicle’sBTSI needs service. 7-39 Ignition Transaxle LockCheck While parked, and with the parking brakeset, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position. The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is inPARK (P). The key should come out only in LOCK. Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P) Mechanism Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release all brakes. Underbody Flushing Service When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged.Make sure thereis room infront of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should thevehicle begin to move. 7-40 At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed below are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall).You should let your GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Proper procedures to perform these services maybe found in a GM service manual.See “Service and Owner Publications” inthe Index. holes, looseconnections or other conditions which could cause a heatbuild-up in the floor panor could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index. Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection Inspect thehoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkagefor interference or binding, Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle and for damaged or missing parts.Replace parts as needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signsof wear or lackof lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary. Exhaust System Inspection Inspect thecomplete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Lookfor broken, damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as openseams, excessive wear.Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables. Brake System Inspection Inspect thecomplete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions resultin frequent braking. 7-41 ~ Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification maybe obtained from your GM dealer. USAGE Coolant Supplement Sealer FLUIDLUBRICANT GM Part No. 3634621 or equivalent with a complete flush and refill. Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid System (GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid). @ USAGE Engine Oil Engine Coolant 7-42 FLUIDLUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index. 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and use only GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@ or Havoline@ DEX-COOL@ coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index. Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint, 1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent). Automatic Transaxle DEXRON@-I11 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 12346241 or equivalent). Windshield Washer Solvent GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515) or eauivalent. USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, Spring Anchor and Release Pawl Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube@ (GM Part No. 12346241 or euuivalent). USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT Fuel Door Hinge Engine oil or LubriplateLubricant (GM Part No. 1050109). Weatherstrip Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579or equivalent). See “Replacement Parts” in theIndex for recommended replacement filters and spark plugs. 7-43 Any additional informationfrom “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on After the scheduled servicesare performed, record the the following record pages. Also, you should retain all date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts.Your owner information portfolio in the boxes provided afterthe maintenance interval. is aconvenient place to store them. Part E: Maintenance Record Maintenance Record DATE 7-44 ODOMETER SERVICED READING BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record 7-45 ~~ Maintenance Record 7-46 Maintenance Record 7-47 Maintenance Record SERVICED BY 7-48 MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will findout how to contactChevrolet if you need assistance.This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and howto report any safety defects. 8-2 8-4 8-5 8-7 8-8 8-9 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Program Canadian Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation GM Participationin an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 8- 10 8- 10 8-11 8-11 8-11 Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada 8-1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Chevrolet dealershave the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date information to promptly address any concerns you may have. However, ifconcern a has not been resolvedto your complete satisfaction, take the following steps: STEP ONE -- Discuss yourconcern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership orthe General Manager. 8-2 STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of In the U S . Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-751-4135 (English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) For help outsideof the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-1315 In other overseas locations, call GM International Product Center in Canada at: (905) 644-4112. In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 8-3 I For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 0 0 0 0 Your name, address,home and business telephone numbers Vehicle Identification Number (Thisis available from the vehicle registrationor title, orthe plate at the top leftof the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location Vehicle deliverydate and present mileage Nature of concern We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However,if you wish to write Chevrolet, address your inquiry to: Chevrolet MotorDivision Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, MI 48007-7047 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H8P7 8-4 Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information bookletfor addresses of GM Overseas offices. When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have a concern. Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available its at Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.) ChevroletIGeo Roadside Assistance Program Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems. If your problemcannot be resolved over thephone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membershipis free, however some services may incur costs. A 1 c I W ‘ Roadside offers two levelsof service to the customer, Basic Care and Courtesy” Care: Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA 0 Free towing for warranty repairs 0 Basic over-the-phone technical advice Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie., wrecker services,locksmithkey service, glass repair, etc.) To enhance Chevrolet’s strongcommitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited toannounce the establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Center. As the owner of a 1997 Chevrolet/Geo, membership in Roadside Assistance is free. 8-5 ~~ ROADSIDE CourtesyTM Care PROVIDES: 0 Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined above) Plus: 0 FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer from a legal roadway) 0 FREE LocksmitWKey Service (when keysare lost on the road or locked inside) 0 FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) 0 FREE Jump Start (at home or onthe road) 0 FREE Fuel Delivery($5 of fuel delivered on the road) Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warrantyto eligible purchasers of 1997 ChevroletIGeo passengercar and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.) Note: Courtesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease Customers operating 1997 and newer ChevroletlGeo vehicles for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles (60 O00 km), whichever occurs first. AllCourtesy Care services must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer Service Management. Basic Care and Courtesy Careare not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at any time. 8-6 - I- For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo dealer to obtain aRoadside Assistance Center brochure. The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services. For prompt assistance whencalling, please have the following available to give to the advisor: Please refer to theRoadside Assistance brochure inside your ownerinformation portfolio for full program details. Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchasedin Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure providedby the dealeror call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) License plate number Vehiclecolor 0 Vehiclelocation Telephone number where youcan be reached 0 Vehicle mileage Description of problem 8-7 Courtesy Transportation Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1997 ChevroletlGeopassenger cars and light duty trucks (pleasesee your selling dealer for details). Courtesy Transportation includes: 0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair completed during thesame day. 0 Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ChevroletlGeo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time without notification. For additional program details, contact your Chevrolet/Geo dealer. Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age. If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet will reimburseup to $30/day for documented transportation you receive. For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, interim transportationmay be available under the Courtesy TransportationProgram. Please consult your dealer for details.The Roadside Assistance programis available only in the United States and Canada. 0 Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance OR for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repairup to five days, OR Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of In Canada,please consult yourGM dealer for rental for any Overnight warranty repair up to five days. information on Courtesy Transportation. Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by your ChevroletlGeo dealer service management.Claim amounts should reflect all actual costs. 8-8 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in thisprogram. Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier inthis section is very successful. There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution todisagreement a regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle automotive disputes. This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied afterfollowing the Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1804 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 To file a claim,you will beasked to provide your name and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statementof the natureof your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. 8-9 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact theBBB at any time.The BBB will attempt to resolve thecomplaint serving as an intermediary.If this mediation is unsuccessful,an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligiblecustomers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject.If you accept the decision,GM will be bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decisionis made. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved Some state lawsmay require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program in individual problems between you, your dealer or or in the courts. For further information, contact the General Motors. BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020. Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information. NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 8-10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada,in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write: In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motorsof Canada Limited Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005 1908 Colonel SamDrive Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles. The toll-free telephone numberfor ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet CustomerAssistance Center P.O. Box 7047 Troy, Michigan 48007-7047 8-11 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operationand servicing of your vehiclecan be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailingit in with your check, money order, or credit card information toHelm, Incorporated (address below) CURRENT PUBLlCAmONSFOR 1997 CHEVROLET/GEO OWNER’S INFORMATION SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance electrical, steering,body, etc. Schedule for all models. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the 1997 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $1 0.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS SERVICE BULLETINS Service Publications are available for current and past Service Bulletins give technical service information neededmodel GM vehicles. To request an order form, please to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. specify year and model name of the vehicle. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. Mail completed order form to: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation. (CUSTOMER'S (ATTENTION) NAME) (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) CODE) (ZIP D A W ' " TELEPHONE NO. I (STATE) 0 AREA CODE ~ ~~~ GM-CHE-ORD97 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in funds. Canadian residents U.S. are to make checks payable inUS. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the U.S. order processing. & 8-14 NOTES 0Section 9 Index Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . 6-3 AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 How Does it Restrain .......................... 1-24 1-22 How it Works ................................ Location .................................... 1-22 Readiness Light ......................... 1.21.2.50 Servicing ................................... 1-25 What Makes it Inflate .......................... 1-23 What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 AirBagSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 AirConditioning ................................ 3-3 Air Conditioning Refrigerants ..................... 6-66 Alignment and Balance. Tire ...................... 6-45 6-53 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning ...................... Antenna. Fixed Mast ............................ 3-20 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Anti-Lock Brake System Active Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53.4.9 Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.4.8 Brakes ...................................... 4-7 Anti.Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 15 Appearancecare ............................... 6-47 Appearance Care Materials ....................... 6-55 Arbitration Program .............................. 8-9 Armrest.Storage ............................... 2-39 Ashtrays ...................................... 2-41 Audio Controls. Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 3-19 Audio Equipment. Adding ........................ Audio System. Tips ............................. 3-18 Audio Systems .................................. 3-6 Auto-Down Window ............................ 2-27 Automatic Overdrive ................................... 2-18 Transaxlecheck .............................. 7-38 Transaxle Fluid ............................... 6-18 Transaxle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Auxiliary Power Connection ...................... 2-42 B a c k - u p Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Battery ....................................... 6-31 Jump Starting ................................. 5-3 Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry............... 2-8 Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3. 5.5 BBB Auto Line ................................. 8-9 Better Business Bureau Mediation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 9-1 9-2 Wheels ..................................... 6-53 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Climate Control System ........................... 3-2 Clock. Setting the ................................ 3-6 Comfort Controls ................................ 3- 1 Compact Disc Care ............................. 3-20 Compact Disc Player ............................ 3- 12 Compact Disc Player Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Compact Spare Tire ............................. 5-35 Console Storage ................................ 2-40 Control of a Vehicle .............................. 4-6 ConvenienceNet ............................... 2-41 Convex Outside Mirror .......................... 2-39 Coolant ....................................... 6-22 6-24 Adding ..................................... Bleedvalves ................................. 5-21 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Heater.Engine ............................... 2-15 RecoveryTank ............................... 5-17 WhattoUse ................................. 6-22 Cooling System ................................ 5-15 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 8-8 Courtesy Transportation ........................... Cruise Control ................................. 2-3 1 Cupholders ............................... 2.39.2.40 . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Damage. Finish ............................... Damage. Sheet Metal ............................ 6-54 6-54 2-34 Daytime Running Lamps ......................... DeadBattery ................................... 5-3 Defects. Reporting Safety ........................ 8-10 Defensive Driving ............................... 4-2 Defogger. Rear Window .......................... 3-5 Defogging ..................................... 3-5 Defrosting ..................................... 3-5 Dimensions.Vehicle ............................ 6-66 Dolby@B Noise Reduction ....................... 3-11 Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement .................... 6-38 2-4 DoorLocks ..................................... Door Storage Compartment ....................... 2-40 Drive Position. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 DriverPosition ................................. 1-12 Driving City ........................................ 4-20 Defensive .................................... 4-2 Drunken ..................................... 4-3 Freeway .................................... 4-21 InaBlizzard ................................. 4-27 In Foreign Countries ........................... 6-4 4-17 IntheRain .................................. Night ...................................... 4-15 OnCurves .................................. 4-10 On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... 4-23 On Snow and Ice ............................. 4-26 Throughwater ............................... 4-19 WetRoads .................................. 4-17 4-25 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 With a Trailer ................................ 4-3 DrunkenDriving ................................ Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15.3. 19. 6.56 Electronic Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Engine ................................... 6.9. 6.10 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15 Coolant Level Check .......................... 7-37 Coolant Temperature Gage ..................... 2-54 Coolant Temperature Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Identification ................................ 6-56 OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Running While Parked ......................... 2-26 Specifications ................................ 6-65 Starting Your ................................ 2- 14 Engine Oil .................................... 6- 11 Adding ..................................... 6-12 Additives ................................... 6-16 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Used ....................................... 6-16 What Kind to Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6- 13 Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 6-4 Ethanol ........................................ Exhaust. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Exterior Lamps ................................. 2-34 Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 6-49 FabricProtection ............................... Fan Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 . . . . . . . 6-5 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Frangais Filter.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 I 9-4 Filter. Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Finish Damage ................................. 6-54 First Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Flashers. Hazard Warning ......................... 5-2 Flat Tire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 FloorMats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Fluids and Lubricants ............................ 7-42 Foreign Countries. Fuel ........................... 6-4 Four-Way Manual Front Seat ...................... 1-3 .. FrenchLanguageManual ........................... 11 Front Parking Bulb Replacement................... 6-33 FrontTowing .................................. 5-10 Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Fuel .......................................... 6-3 Canadian .................................... 6-3 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 In Foreign Countries ........................... 6-4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 2-54 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 GloveBox .................................... 2-39 4-30 Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................... 4-30.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Guide en GVWR ....................................... 4-30 Halogen Bulbs ................................ 6-32 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Bulb Replacement ............................ 6-32 High/Low Beam Changer ...................... 2-29 On Reminder ................................ 2-34 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 HearingDamage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance .............. 8-4 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Highway Hypnosis .............................. 4-23 HillandMountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Hitches. Trailer ................................. 4-34 Hood Checking Things Under ......................... 6-7 Release ...................................... 6-8 Horn ......................................... 2-27 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13 Illumination. Sustained Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40 Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41 Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41 ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Front Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Front Drive Axle Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41 Radiator and Heater Hose ...................... 7-41 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41 Suspension .................................. 7-41 Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41 Instrumentpanel ............................... 2-44 Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Cleaning .................................... 6-50 Cluster ................................ 2.46.2.47 FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 Interior Lamps ................................. 2-35 Jack. Tire .................................... Jump Starting ................................... 5-26 5-3 K e y Lock Cylinders Service ..................... Key Reminder Warning .......................... Keys .......................................... 7-38 2-14 2-2 Labels Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Tire-Loading Information ...................... 4r29 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Lamps ........................................ 2-34 2-35 Courtesy .................................... Exterior .................................... 2-34 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-6 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-23 2-41 Lighter ....................................... Lights Air Bag Readiness ....................... 1.21.2.50 Anti-Lock Brake System Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53.4.9 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.4.8 Brake SystemWarning .................... 2.51.6.29 2-59 ChangeOilSoon ............................. 2-50 Charging System ............................. Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 2-53 Interior ..................................... 2-35 Low Coolant Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.6.24 Low Oil Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58.6.11 2-57 Oil Warning ................................. 1.7.2.49 Safety Belt Reminder ...................... Security .................................... 2-59 Service Engine Soon .......................... 2-55 4-29 Loading YourVehicle ........................... Locks ......................................... 2-4 7-38 Cylinders ................................... Door ........................................ 2-4 Key Lock Cylinder Service ..................... 7-38 2-5 PowerDoor .................................. RearDoorSecurity ............................. 2-5 Steering Column Park Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 2-10 Trunk ...................................... Window .................................... 2-27 4-14 Loss of Control ................................ Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54.6.24 Low Oil Level Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58.6.11 Lubricants and Fluids ............................ 7-42 7-38 Lubrication Service. Body ........................ 9-6 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 MaintenanceRecord ............................ 7-44 Maintenance Schedule ............................ 7-1 7-27 Long Tripmighway ........................... Long Tripmighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Long Tripmighway Intervals ..................... 7-6 Owner Checks and Services..................... 7-37 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7-7 Short Trip/City ................................ Short Trip/City Definition ....................... 7-5 Short Trip/City Intervals ........................ 7-5 Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ...................... 2-55 ManualFrontSeat ............................... 1-2 2-38 Manual Remote Control Mirror .................... 6-4 Methanol ...................................... Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 2-38 Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... Manual Remote Control ........................ 2-38 Power Outside ............................... 2-38 Visorvanity ................................. 2-42 MMT ......................................... 6-4 Mode Knob. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 MountainRoads ................................ 4-23 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 N e t . Convenience .............................. Neutral. Automatic Transaxle ..................... New Vehicle “Break-In” ......................... Nightvision ................................... 2-41 2- 18 2- 13 4-16 Odometer .................................... 2-48 Odometer. Trip ................................. 2-48 Off-Road Recovery ............................. 4- 12 6-11 Oil. Engine .................................... Oil Warning Light .............................. 2-57 Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2- 18 Overheating Engine ............................. 5- 13 Owner Checks and Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 8- 12 Owner Publications. Ordering ..................... P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................ Park Automatic Transaxle .......................... Shifting Into ................................. Shifting Out of ............................... Parking AtNight .................................... Brake ...................................... Brake and Automatic TransaxlePARK (P) Mechanism Check ........................... Lots ....................................... Over Things That Burn ........................ With a Trailer ................................ Parking On Hills. Leaving ........................ Passenger Position .............................. 6-54 2- 17 2-21 2-24 2-11 2-20 7-40 2-11 2-25 4-37 4-38 1-20 ............................. 4-13 Passing ..6. . . . . . . PASS-Key I1 ................................. 2-11 Periodic Maintenance Inspections .................. 7-41 Power Door Locks ................................... 2-5 OptionFuses ................................ 6-57 Outside Mirror ............................... 2-38 Seat ......................................... 1-4 4-10 Steering .................................... Steering Fluid ................................ 6-26 2-27 Windows ................................... Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-19 Problems on the Road ............................ 5-1 Publications. Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Radiator ..................................... 5-20 Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Radio Reception ................................ 3-18 Radios ........................................ 3-6 Rain. Driving In ................................ 4-17 Rain. OtherTips ................................ 4-19 2-37 ReadingLamps ................................ Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 2-5 Outside Seat Position ..................... 1.27. 1.50 1-30 Safety Belt Comfort Guides ..................... SeatPassengers ............................... 1-27 Towing ..................................... 5-11 3-5 WindowDefogger ............................. Rearview Mirror.Insi‘de Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks ......................... 9-7 SecurityLight .................................. 2-59 Security System ................................ 2- 1 1 Service ........................................ 6-2 Bulletins. Ordering ............................ 8- 12 EngineSoonLight ............................ 2-55 Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12 Parts Identification Label ....................... 6-56 Publications. Ordering ......................... 8- 12 Publications. Ordering in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11 Work. Doing Your Own ......................... 6-2 Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Service Publications ............................. 8- 12 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Sheet Metal Damage ............................ 6-54 ShiftLever .................................... 2-16 Shifting Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16 Into Park (P) ................................. 2-21 2-24 OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster..................... 1- 14 SignalingTurns ................................ 2-29 4-14 Skidding ...................................... Sound Equipment. Adding........................ 3- 19 Spare Tire Compact .................................... 5-35 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire . 5-28 Specifications and Capacities ...................... 6-64 Specifications.Engine ........................... 6-65 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 2-48 Speedometer ................................... 6-47 Stains. Cleaning ................................ Starter Switch Check ............................ 7-39 Starting Your Engine ............................ 2-14 Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Column Park Lock Check ...................... 7-40 In Emergencies ............................... 4-11 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Wheel. Tilt .................................. 2-28 Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 3-17 Storage Compartments ........................... 2-39 Storage. Vehicle ................................ 6-31 Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Sunvisors .................................... 2-41 Sunroof ....................................... 2-43 ... Symbols.Vehicle ................................ vm Synchronization. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Tachometer .................................. 2-48 Taillamp Bulb Replacement ....................... 6-37 TapePlayerCare ............................... 3-19 Temperature Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 3-15 Theft-Deterrent Feature .......................... THEFTLOCK ................................ 3-15 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 2-28 Tilt Steering Wheel ............................. Time. Setting the ................................ 3-5 6-46 Tirechains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 TM 9-9 Tires ......................................... 6-39 Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-45 BuyingNew ................................. 6-43 Chains ..................................... 6-46 ChangingaFlat .............................. 5-24 Cleaning .................................... 6-54 Compact Spare ............................... 5-35 Inflation .................................... 6-40 Inflationcheck ............................... 7-37 Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 1 4-29 Loading .................................... Pressure .................................... 6-40 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Storing the Flat Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Temperature ................................. 6-44 6-44 Traction .................................... Treadwear ................................... 6-44 Uniform Quality Grading ....................... 6-43 6-46 Used Replacement Wheels ...................... 6-42 WearIndicators .............................. Wheel Replacement ........................... 6-45 6-42 When It’s Time for New ....................... TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 TorqueLock ................................... 2-24 Torque, Wheel Nut .............................. 5-32 4-31 Towing a Trailer ................................ 5-8 Towing Your Vehicle ............................. Trailer 4-36 Backingup ................................. 4-35 Brakes ..................................... 4-37 Driving on Grades ............................ Driving with ................................. 4-35 FollowingDistance ........................... 4-36 4-34 Hitches ..................................... 4-38 Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-36 MakingTurns ................................ ParkingonHills .............................. 4-37 Passing ..................................... 4-36 Safety Chains ................................ 4-35 Tongueweight ............................... 4-33 Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Towing ..................................... 4-31 Turnsignals ................................. 4-37 4-33 Weight ..................................... Transaxle Fluid, Automatic ....................... 6-18 Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Transportation,Courtesy .......................... 8-8 Trip, Before Leaving ............................ 4-22 Trip Odometer ................................. 2-48 TrUnk Lock ....................................... 2-10 2-10 Release, Remote .............................. TTYUsers ..................................... 8-4 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 7-40 Underbody Flushing Service ..................... UnderbodyMaintenance ......................... 6-54 Underhood Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.60.6.62 9-10 . . . Vehicle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Damagewarnings .............................. vii Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66 IdentificationNumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-56 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Storage ..................................... 6-3...1 Symbols ..................................... vi11 Ventilation System ............................... 3-4 VisorVanity Mirrors ............................ 2-41 Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10 Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Wheel Alignment .................................. 6-45 NutTorque .................................. 5-32 6-45 Replacement ................................. Wrench ..................................... 5-26 Window Lock Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Power ...................................... 2-27 WindshieldWasher ............................. 2-30 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30.6.27 FluidLevelCheck ............................ 7-37 Windshield Wipers .............................. 2-30 BladeReplacement ........................... 6-39 Fuses ...................................... 6-57 Winter Driving ................................. 4-25 Wiper Blade Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Wiring. Headlamp .............................. 6-57 WreckerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Wrench. Wheel ................................. 5-26 Y o u r Driving and the Road ....................... 4-1 9-11 0 Service Station Checkpoints ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR P5-17 AND P6-22 TI RES P6-39 ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK P6-11 SECONDARY HOOD RELEASE WINDSHIELD WASHER REMOTE P6-8 FLUID P6-27 P6-6 EATERY TERMINAL P5-3 HOOD FUEL TRUNK REMOTE RELEASE RELEASE P2-10 DOOR For detailed information,refer to the page numberlisted, or see the Index in the backof the owner's manual. 9-12 I I